HP Notebook Series Hardware And Software Manual
H ardware an d So f t w are Gu id e HP Notebook Ser ie s Doc ument P art Number: 3 7 5 80 2 -001 December 200 4 This guide explains ho w to identify , access, and use the hardware and software features a vailable on your notebook.
© Copyright 2004 He wlett-Packard Dev elopment Company , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. Adobe and Acrobat ar e trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. HP Note book Series Fi r s t Ed i t io n D e c e m b e r 2 0 0 4 R ef er ence Number : z e2000 Document P a rt Numb er : 3 7 5 80 2 -0 01 Hardware and Software Guide
Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide iii Cont ent s 1 Hardware Top Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â1 TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â3 Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 Wireless and Volume Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â7 Antennae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â8 Front Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â9 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â9 Speakers, Jacks and Display Release Button. . . . . . 1â11 Rear Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â12 Left-Side Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â13 Ports and Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â13 PC Card Slot and Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â14 Right-Side Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â15 Bottom Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â17 Mini PCI and Memory Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 1â17 Bays, Battery Latch and Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â18 Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â19 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â19 Optical Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â20 Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â21
i v Hard war e and So ft w are Guide Cont ent s 2 TouchPad and Keyboard TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Identifying TouchPad Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using the TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Setting TouchPad Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Identifying Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Hotkey Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6 Using Hotkey Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 Using Hotkey Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â14 Using the Embedded Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . 2â14 Using an External Numeric Keypa d . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â17 3P o w e r Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 Selecting a Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 Switching Between Battery and External Power . . . . 3â3 Power Control and Light Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â4 Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Overviews . . . . . . . 3â5 Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â5 Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â6 Leaving Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â7 Interference with Drive Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â7 Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . 3â8 Turning the Notebook On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â8 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â9 Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation . . . . . . . . . 3â10 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . 3â11 Power Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 Using Power Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 Setting a Standby Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 Setting Other Power Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12
Cont ent s Hard war e and So ftwar e Guide v Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 Charging a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . 3â15 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â17 Calibrating a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â19 Conserving Battery Pack Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â23 Replacing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â25 Storing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â27 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â27 4 Multimedia Internal Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 Volume Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 External Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â3 Using the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack . . . . . . . . . . 4â3 Using the Audio-In (Microphone) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 External Video Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 Connecting an S-Video Device (Select Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 Displaying a Video Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7 CD and DVD Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â8 Inserting or Removing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â8 Using Media Activity Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â9 Setting AutoPlay Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â10 Protecting Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â11 Protecting a CD or DVD Write Process . . . . . . . . . 4â12 Observing the Copyright Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â12 Changing DVD Region Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â13 Multimedia Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â15 Multimedia Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â15 Selecting Multimedia Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â16 Installing WinDVD Creator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â17
v i Hard war e and So ft w are Guide Cont ent s 5 Wireless (Select Models Only) Wireless Local Area Network ( Select Models Only) . . . 5â2 Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4 Using a WLAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5 Using Wireless Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 Installing Wireless Software (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 Troubleshooting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 Bluetooth (Select Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 Device Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 Turning On the Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 Turning Off and Disabling the Devices . . . . . . . . . . 5â14 6 Security Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â1 Security Preferences in the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â3 QuickLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â3 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â4 HP and Windows Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 HP and Windows Password Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 6â6 HP Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â8 Setting HP Administrator Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â8 Entering HP Administrator Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . 6â9 Power-On Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â10 Setting Power-On Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â10 Entering Power-On Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â11 Device Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â12 Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â13 Critical Security Updates for Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . 6â14 Firewall Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â15 Optional Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â16
Cont ent s Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide v ii 7 Hardware Upgrades and Replacements Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â1 Connecting Any Powered Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â1 Connecting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â2 Connecting a 1394 Device (Select Models Only) . . . 7â3 Connecting a Communication Devi ce . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â4 Digital Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â5 Using the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader Light . . . . . . 7â6 Inserting a Digital Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â7 Removing a Digital Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â8 PC Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â9 Inserting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â10 Stopping or Removing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â11 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Adding a Drive to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Using the IDE Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Caring for Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â13 Replacing the Internal Hard Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â14 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â19 Increasing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â19 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . . . . . . . 7â20 8 Software Updates and Recoveries and System Software Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â1 Preparing for a Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â2 Downloading and Installing an Up date . . . . . . . . . . . 8â3 Software Recoveries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â7 Using System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â7 Repairing or Reinstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â8 Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9 Accessing the Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9
v iii Hard war e and So ft w are Guide Cont ent s Displaying Hotkey Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â12 Setting Button Assignments on an External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â13 Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â14 Opening the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â14 Changing the Language of the Setup Utility . . . . . . 8â15 Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . . . . . 8â15 Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â16 Restoring Default Settings in the Setup Utility . . . . 8â17 Using Advanced Setup Utility Features . . . . . . . . . 8â18 Closing the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â19 A Specifications Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aâ1 Rated Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aâ2 Expansion Port Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aâ3 Index
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â1 1 Ha r d w ar e To p C o m p o n e n t s Keys Component Description 1 Function ke ys (12) P erform system and application tasks. When combined with fn, the function ke ys perform additional tasks as hotke ys. 2 Windows logo k e y Displa ys the Microsoft® Windows® Star t menu. (Continued)
1â2 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e 3 fn key Combines with other ke ys to perform system tasks. F or example , pressing fn f7 decreases screen brightness. 4 K eypad k eys (15) Can be used like the k eys on an e xter nal n umeric ke ypad. 5 Windows applications key Displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . Component Description
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â3 To u c h P a d Component Description 1 T ouchP ad* Mov es the pointer . 2 Left T ouchP ad button* Functions like the left b utton on an e xter nal mouse . 3 Right T ouchP ad button* Functions like the right bu tton on an e xter nal mouse . 4 T ouchP ad ver tical scrolling region* Scrolls upward or do wnwa rd. *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf or mation about changing the functions of T ouchP ad components, see the âSetting T ouchP ad Pref erencesâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchP ad and K eyboard. â
1â4 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Po we r C o n t r o l s Component Description 1 Displa y s witch* If the notebook is clos ed while on, initiates standby . 2 P ower/standb y button* When the notebook is â Off , press to tur n on the notebook. â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standby , briefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. â If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf or mation about changing the function of the displa y s witch or po wer/standb y b utton, see the âSetting Other P ower Pref erencesâ section in Chapter 3, âP ower . â
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â5 Ligh ts Component Description 1 Caps loc k light On: Caps lock is on. 2 P ower/standb y light â¡ On: Notebook is tur ned on. Blinking: Notebook is in standby . Off: Notebook is off . 3 Mute light On: V olume is muted. (Continued)
1â6 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Component Description 4 Wireless light (av ailable on select models)* On: One or more optional inter nal wireless de vices, such as a WLAN and/or a Bluetooth® de vice (select models only), are tur ned on. â 5 Num lock light On: Num lock or the embedded numeric ke ypad is on. *The wireless lights (on the wireless b utton and on the front of the notebook) displa y the same inf ormation. The wireless light on the wireless button is visib le only when the notebo ok is open; the wire less light on the front of the notebook is visib l e when the notebook is closed. â F or inf or mation about estab l is hing a wireless link, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless . â¡ The pow er/standby light associated with the po wer/standb y b utton and the pow er/standb y light on the front of the notebook displa y the same inf or mation. The po wer/standb y light associated with the pow er/standby button is visib le only when the notebook is open; the power/standb y light on the front of the notebo ok is visible when the notebook is closed.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â7 Wir eles s and V olum e But tons Component Description 1 V olume down b utton Decreases system v olume. 2 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores v olume. 3 V olume up button Increases system v olume. 4 Wireless b utton (av ailable on select models) T urns the wireless functionality on or off b ut does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. F or inf or mation about estab lishing a wireless link, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless.
1â8 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Antennae Component Description Antennae (2)* Send and receiv e wireless de vice signals. Ã Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output pow er of this de vice is below the FCC radio frequency e xposure limits. Ne v er theless, the de vice should be used in such a manner that the potential f or human contact during nor mal oper ation is minimized. T o a void the possibility of e xceeding the FCC radio frequency e xposure limits, human pro ximity to the antennae should be not less than 20 cm (8 inches) during nor mal operation, including when the notebook displa y is closed. *The antennae are av ailable on se lect models . The antennae are not visib le from the outside of the not ebook. F or optimal transmission, k eep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â9 Fr ont C omponen ts Ligh ts Component Description 1 Wireless light* (a vailab le on select models) On: One or more optional inter nal wireless de vices, such as a WLAN and/or a Bluetooth de vice (select models only), are tur ned on. â 2 P ower/standb y light â¡ On: Notebook is tur ned on. Blinking: Notebook is in standby . Off: Notebook is off . (Continued)
1â10 Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Component Description 3 IDE (Integrated Driv e Electronics) drive light On or blinking: The internal hard drive or an optical drive is being accessed. 4 Batter y light On: The batter y pac k is charging. Blinking: The batter y pac k has reached a low-battery condition. Off: The batter y pac k is fully charged or not inser ted. *The wireless lights displa y the same inf or mation. The wireless light on the front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed; the wireless light on the wireless button is visib l e only when the notebook is open. â F or inf ormation about establ ishing a wireless link, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless. â¡ The pow er/standby light associated with the po wer/standb y button and the pow er/standby light on the front of the notebook displa y the same inf or mation. The po wer/standb y light associated with the pow er/standby button is visib le when the notebook is open; the power/standb y light on the front of the notebook is visible only when the notebook is closed.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â11 Speak ers , Jac ks and Dis play R elea se Bu tton Component Description 1 Stereo speake rs (2) Produce stereo sound. 2 Displa y release button Opens the notebook. 3 A udio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional monaural (single sound channel) microphone. 4 A udio-out (headphone) jack Connects optional headphones or pow ered stereo speakers . Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR.
1â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Rea r C om po ne nt s Component Description Exhaust v ent* Provides airflo w to cool intern al components. Ã T o pre vent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to b lock airflow . *The notebook has 4 v ents. This and all other v ents are visible on the bottom of the notebook. One v ent is also visible on the left side of the notebook.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â13 Left -Si de Com ponents P or ts and J ac ks Component Description 1 P ower connector Connects the A C adapter cab le. 2 Monitor por t Connects an optional V GA monitor or projector . 3 Expansion por t (av ailable on select models)* Connects the notebook to an optional Expansion Base. 4 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional network cable . 5 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects the modem cable . 6 USB por t â Connects an optional USB de vice. *F or e xpansion por t signal information, see the âExpansion P or t Input/Output Signalsâ section in âAppendix A. â â Depending on the model, the notebook has 2 or 3 USB por ts . The other USB por ts are on the righ t side of the notebook.
1â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e P C C ard Slot and But ton Component Description 1 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 2 PC Card eject button Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â15 Righ t- Side C ompon ents Component Description 1 USB por ts (1 or 2 depending on the notebook model)* Connect optional USB de vices. 2 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot (a vailab le on select models) Suppor ts an optional digital memor y card. â 3 1394 por t (select models only) Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , a digital camera, or a digital camcorder . 4 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light (av ailable on select models) On: An optional digital memor y card is being accessed. 5 Optical drive â¡ Suppor ts an optical disc. (Continued)
1â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Component Description 6 S-Videoâout jac k (av ailable on select models) Connects an optional S-Video de vice such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 7 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. Ã Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents ma y not pre v ent a product from being mishandled or stolen. *Depending on the model, the notebook has 2 or 3 USB por ts. The other USB por t is on the left side. â The digital memor y card could be a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card, Memor y Stic k, Memor y Stic k Pro , xD -Picture Card, MultiMediaCard, or Smar tMedia (SM) card. â¡ The type of optical driveâf or example , a D VD-ROM drive , a D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive , or a D VD R/RW an d CD-R W Combo Dr iv eâvaries by notebook model.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â17 Bot tom C omponen ts Mini PCI and Memor y C ompartm ents Component Description 1 Mini PCI compar tment Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice. Ã T o pre vent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI de vice authorized f or use in yo ur notebook by the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in y our countr y . If you install an unauthorized de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the de vice to restore notebook functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 2 Memor y compar tment Contains 2 memor y slots that suppor t replaceable memory modules. The number of preinstalled memor y modules v ar ies b y notebook model.
1â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Ba y s , Bat t ery La tch an d V e nts Component Description 1 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pac k. 2 Batter y pac k release latch Releases a batter y pac k from the batter y ba y .* 3 Exhaust vents (4) â Provide airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre vent o verheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thic k rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . 4 Hard dr iv e bay Holds the inter nal hard drive . * B a tt ery pa c ks v a ry b y m o d e l. â The notebook has 4 v ents. One v ent is also visible on the rear of the notebook.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â19 Additional C omponents Har d w ar e The components included with your notebook v ary by region, country , notebook model, and the optional hardware you purchased. The follo wing sections identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Component Description 1 Batter y pac k* P owers the notebook when the notebook is not connected to e xter nal po wer . 2 A C adapter Conv er ts AC pow er to DC power . 3 P ower cord* Connects an A C adapter to an A C outlet. 4 Modem cable* Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a countr y-specific modem adapter . 5 Countr y-specific modem adapter (included b y region as required)* Adapts the modem cab le to a nonâRJ-11 (modem) jack. *Batter y pac ks v ar y b y model. P o w er cords, modem cab les, and modem adapters v ar y in appearan ce b y region and countr y .
1â20 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Opt ica l D i scs Software on optical discs, such as CDs or D VDs, is included with all notebook models. â The software applications packaged in the Required for Setup bag are not preinstalled on your notebook. Depending on ho w you want to use your notebook, you might want to install some or all of these applications. â The software applications packaged in the Sa ve for Later bag are preinstalled or preloaded on your notebook. The software discs are provided in case you e ver need to repair or reinstall this software. â Additional discs packaged with your notebook provide operating system recov ery software and dri ver reco v ery software. Application reco very softw are is prov ided with select notebook models. â The Notebook Documentation CD contains Adobe® Acrobat® PDF f iles, not software. The f iles on the Notebook Documentation CD are not preinstalled or preloaded on your notebook.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â21 Labels The labels af f ixed to the notebook pro vide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or tra vel internationally with the notebook. â Service T agâProvides the product name, product number (P/N), and serial number (S/N) of your notebook. Y ou might need the product number and the serial number when you contact Customer Care. The Service T ag label is aff ixed to the bottom of the notebook. T o display the information on the Service T ag on your screen, select Start > Help and Support. â Microsoft Certif icate of AuthenticityâContains the Microsoft® W indows® Product K ey . Y ou might need the Product K e y to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certif icate is af fix ed to the bottom of the notebook. â Regulatory labelâPro vides regulatory information about the notebook. The Regulatory label is af fix ed to the inside of the battery bay . â Modem Approv al labelâProvides re gulatory information about the modem and lists the agency appro v al markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approv ed for use. Y ou might need this information when tra veling internationally . The Modem Approv al label is af f ixed to the inside of the memory compartment co v er . â W ireless certification labelsâSome notebook models include an optional WLAN de vice and/or an optional Bluetooth® de vice. If your notebook model includes one or more wireless de vices, a certif icate providing re gulatory information about each de vice and the approv al markings of some of the countries in which the de vice has been approv ed for use is included with your notebook. Y ou might need this information when tra veling internationally . W ireless certif ication labels are af f ixed to the inside of the Mini PCI compartment cov er .
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â1 2 T ouc hP a d and K e yboard To u c h P a d Id entifying T ouchP a d Com ponents The T ouchPad includes the follo wing components: 1 T ouchP ad 3 Right T ouchP ad b utton 2 Left T ouchP ad button 4 T ouchP ad ve r tical scrolling region
2â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Using t he T ouc hP ad The T ouchPad pro vides the navigation, selection, and scroll functions of an optional external mouse: â T o mov e the pointer , slide your finger across the T ouchPad surface in the direction you wa nt to mov e the pointer . â T o ex ecute the click functions of the left or right button on an external mouse, press the left or right T ouchPad b utton. â T o scroll, place your finger onto a scrolling re gion, and then slide your f inger along the scrolling region in the direction you want to scroll. (Sliding your f inger from the T ouchPad to a scrolling region without f irst lifting your finger from the T ouchPad and then placing it on the scrolling re gion will not acti v ate the scrolling region.) The T ouchPad is enabled when the notebook is turned on. If you work with k eystrok es rather than mouse actions, you might prefer to disable the T ouchPad to pre v ent accidental T ouchP ad acti vity .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â3 Set ting T o uchP a d Pr efer ences In the W indo ws Mouse Properties windo w you can â Adjust basic pointing de vice settings such as click speed, pointer speed and shape, and mouse trails. â Conf igure the right and left T ouchPad b uttons for right-handed or left-handed use. These b uttons are set by default for right-handed use. T o access the Mouse Properties window , select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hard war e > Mouse. â All W indow s instructions in your notebook documentation describe Microsoft W indows XP procedures based on the def ault W indows XP cate gory view . For information about switching between W indows XP classic vie w and W indo ws XP category vie w , select Start > Help and Support > Customizing y our computer > Files, f olders, and pr ograms > Use Windo ws classic f olders. In the T ouchPad Pr operties windo w you can access additional T ouchPad preferences. » T o access the T ouchPad Properties windo w , use the T ouchPad to select Start > Contr ol Panel > Printers and Other Hardwar e > Mouse > Device Settings , and then select the Settings button. (If you follo w this path using an optional external mouse, the T ouchPad Pr operties windo w might be una v ailable.)
2â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Among the preferences a v ailable in the T ouchPad Pr operties windo w are â T ouchPad T apping, which enables you to tap the T ouchPad once to select an item or twice to double-click an item. T o access T ouchPad T apping settings, select Ta p p i n g . â Edge Motion, which sets the T ouchPad to continue cursor mov ement when your finger reaches the edge of the T ouchPad. T o access Edge Motion settings, select Pointer Motion. â Long Distance Scrolling, which sets the scrolling region to continue scrolling when your f inger reaches the end of the scrolling region. T o access Long Distance Scrolling, select V irtual Scrolling . â PalmCheck, which helps k eep the T ouchPad from being accidentally acti v ated while you are using the ke yboard. T o access PalmCheck, select Sensitivity .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â5 Hot k e y s Id entifying Hotk e ys Hotke ys are preset combinations of the esc key 1 , the fn key 2 , and one of the function ke ys 3 . The icons on the f1 through f12 ke ys represent hotke y functions. Hotke y functions and procedures are described in the follo wing sections.
2â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Hot k e y Quick R ef ere nce The follo wing table identif ies the default hotke y functions. The function of the fn f5 hotke y can be changed. For instructions, see the âSetting Other Po wer Preferencesâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â Default Function Hotkey Opens Help and Suppor t Center . fn f1 Opens print options window . fn f2 Opens def ault Inter net bro wser . fn f3 Switches the image among displa ys. fn f4 Initiates standb y . fn f5 Initiates QuickLoc k. fn f6 Decreases screen brightness. fn f7 Increases screen brightness. fn f8 Pla ys, pauses , or resumes an audio CD or D VD . fn f9 Stops an audio CD or D VD . fn f10 Pla ys the pre vious trac k or chapter on an audio CD or DV D. fn f11 Pla ys the ne xt trac k or chap ter on an audio CD or D VD . fn f12 Displa ys system inf ormation.* fn esc *T o clear the system information display , press esc .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â7 Using Hotk e y Procedure s Using H otk e y s On t he Intern al K e yboard T o use a hotkey command on the notebook k e yboard, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Briefly press fn, and then briefly press the second ke y of the hotke y command. â Press and hold do wn fn, briefly press the second ke y of the hotke y command, and then release both ke ys at the same time. Using H otk e y s on an External K e yboard T o use a hotkey command on an e xternal ke yboard, press the scroll lock ke y twice, then the second ke y only of the hotke y combination. For e xample, to use the fn f5 command on an external k e yboard, press scroll lock scroll lock f5. Using Hotk e y Comman ds Open H elp and Sup port Cen ter (fn f1 ) The fn f1 hotke y opens the Help and Support Center . In addition to providing information about your operating system, the Help and Support Center provides â Information about your notebook, such as model and serial number , installed software, hardware components, and specif ications. â Answers to questions about using your notebook. â T utorials to help you learn to use notebook and operating system features. â Updates for your operating system, dri vers, and the softw are provided on your notebook.
2â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d â Checkups for notebook functionality . â Automated and interacti v e troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recov ery procedures. â Links to Customer Care. Y ou can also access the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. Open Prin t W indo w (fn f2) In W indows the fn f2 hotk ey opens the print options windo w of the acti ve W indows application. Open In ternet Expl or er (fn f3 ) The fn f3 hotke y opens Internet Explorer . â Until you ha ve set up your Internet or netw ork services, the fn f3 hotke y opens the W indo ws Internet Connection wizard. For information about using this wizard and other Internet connection methods, refer to the printed Getting Started guide included with your notebook. â After you ha ve set up your Internet or netw ork services and your W eb browser home page, you can use the fn f3 hotke y to quickly access your home page and the Internet.
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â9 S witc h Imag e (fn f4) The fn f4 hotke y switches the image among display de vices connected to the system. For e xample, if an optional monitor is connected to the notebook through the monitor port, each time you press the fn f4 hotke y the image will switch among the notebook display , the monitor display , and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the monitor . Most monitors recei v e video information from the notebook using the external V GA video standard. The fn f4 hotke y can also toggle images among other de vices recei ving video information from the notebook. The follo wing video transmission types, with examples of de vices that use them, are supported by the fn f4 hotke y: â LCD (notebook display) â External VGA (most monitors) â S-V ideo (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with S-V ideoâin jacks) â Composite video (tele visions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with composite video-in jacks) â Composite video de vices can be connected to the system only by using an HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable.
2â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Initia te Standb y (fn f5 ) The fn f5 hotke y is set by def ault to initiate standby . When standby is initiated, your w ork is sa ved in random access memory (RAM), the screen clears, and po wer is conserve d. While the notebook is in standby , the power/standb y lights blink. â T o initiate standby , the notebook must be on. If the notebook is in hibernation, you must restore from hibernation before you can initiate standby . â T o resume from standby or restore from hibernation, briefly press the po we/standby b utton. For more information about using standb y and hibernation, see Chapter 3, âPo wer . â The function of the fn f5 hotke y can be changed in the operating system. For e xample, you can set the fn f5 hotke y to initiate hibernation instead of standby . In all W indo ws operating system windo ws, references to the sleep b utton apply to the fn f5 hotke y . For information about changing the function of the fn f5 hotke y , see the âSetting Other Po wer Preferencesâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â For more information about using standb y and hibernation, see Chapter 3, âPo wer . â
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â11 Initia te Quic kLoc k (fn f6) The fn f6 hotke y initiates the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your work b y displaying the operating system Log On windo w . While the Log On windo w is displayed, the notebook cannot be accessed un til a W indows user passw ord or a W indo ws administrator password is entered. Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a W indo ws user password or a W indo ws administrator password. F or instructions, refer to the Help and Support Center . T o access the Help and Support Center , press the fn f1 hotke y or select Start > Help and Support. » T o use QuickLock, press fn f6 to display the Log On windo w and lock the notebook. Then follo w the instructions on the screen to enter your W indo ws user password or your W indows administrator passw o rd and access the notebook. For information about combining W indows passw ords with HP passwords, refert to Chapter 6, âSecurity . â Dec rease Brightn ess (fn f7) The fn f7 hotke y decreases the brightness of the notebook screen. The longer you hold do wn the fn f7 hotke y , the more the screen dims. Decreasing screen brightness conserves po wer . » T o increase screen brightness, press the fn f8 hotke y . Inc rease Bri ghtness (fn f8 ) The fn f8 hotke y increases the brightness of the notebook screen. The longer you hold do wn the fn f8 hotke y , the more the screen brightens. » T o decrease screen brightness, press the fn f7 hotke y .
2â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Medi a Activ it y Hotk e y s (fn f9 t hr ough fn f1 2) The follo wing 4 media acti vity hotke ys can control the play of an audio CD or a D VD. T o control the play of a video CD, use the media acti vity controls in your video CD player . P lay , P a use, or R esume an Audio CD or a D VD (fn f9) â If the audio CD or the D VD is not playing, press the fn f9 hotke y to be gin or resume the play . â If the audio CD or the D VD is playing, press the fn f9 h ot key to pause the play . Stop an Audio CD or a D V D (fn f1 0 ) The fn f10 hotke y stops the play of an audio CD or a D VD. Y ou must stop a CD or D VD that is playing before you can remov e it from the optical dri v e. F or more information about inserting or removing a CD or D VD, see the âInserting or Removing a Discâ section in Chapter 4, âMultimedia. â P lay Pr e vious T rac k or Ch apter of an Audio CD or a D VD (fn f1 1 ) The fn f11 hotke y plays the pre vious track of an audio CD or the pre vious chapter of a D VD that is playing. Pl a y N ext Tr a c k o r C h a p t e r o f a n A u d i o C D o r a D VD (fn f1 2) The fn f12 hotk ey plays the ne xt track of an audio CD or the ne xt chapter of a D VD that is playing.
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â13 Disp lay S y s tem Inf orma tion (fn e sc) The fn esc hotke y displays information about system hardware components and software v ersion numbers. T o clear the display , press esc. In the fn esc display , the version of the system BIOS (basic input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some notebook models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. The BIOS date is sometimes called the system R OM version number . For information about updating the system R OM, see the âSoftware Updatesâ section in Chapter 8, âSoftw are Updates and Recov eries and System Softw are. â
2â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Key p a d s Y ou can do ke ypad work with your notebook b y using the embedded numeric ke ypad in the notebook ke yboard or b y connecting an optional external numeric k eypad. The embedded numeric ke ypad cannot be used while an external ke ypad is connected to the notebook. Using t he Embedd ed Numeri c K e ypad The embedded numeric ke ypad consis ts of 15 keys that can be used like the k eys on an e xternal numeric ke ypad. When the embedded numeric ke ypad is turned on, each ke ypad ke y performs the functions indicated by the icon in the upper -right corner of the ke y .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â15 T urning t he Embedde d Numeric K e ypad On an d Off When the embedded numeric ke ypad is of f, press fn num lk 1 to turn the ke ypad on. The num lock light 2 is turned on. When the embedded numeric ke ypad is on, press fn num lk to turn the ke ypad of f. The num lock light is turned of f.
2â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d S witc hing t he Fu nc tions of K e ypad K e ys Y ou can temporarily switch the functions of an embedded numeric ke ypad ke y between its standard function and its ke ypad function. â T o use a key on the k e ypad as a ke ypad ke y while the ke ypad is turned of f, press and hold fn while pressing the ke y . â T o use a key on the k eypad as a standard k ey while the ke ypad is turned on: â Press and hold fn to type with the ke y in lo wercase. â Press and hold fn shift to type with the ke y in uppercase. Releasing fn returns a keypad k ey to its set function. F or e xample, a ke ypad ke y returns to its ke ypad function if the ke ypad is turned on or to its standard function if the ke ypad is turned of f.
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â17 Using an External N umeric K e ypad â The embedded numeric ke ypad cannot be turned on while an optional external numeric k eypad is connected to the notebook. Most ke ys on most external numeric k e ypads function dif ferently when num lock mode is on than when num lock mode is of f. For exa mp le : â When num lock mode is on, most ke ypad ke ys type numbers. â When num lock mode is of f, most ke ypad ke ys function like the arro w , page up, or page down k eys. T urning Num Loc k Mode On an d Off As Yo u Wo r k T o turn num lock mode on or off on an e xternal numeric keypad as you work, press the num lk ke y on the external k eypad, not on the notebook. â When an external numeric k e ypad is turned on and is in num lock mode, the num lock light on the notebook is on. â When an external numeric k eypad is turned of f or is turned on with num lock mode turned of f, the num lock light on the notebook is of f.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â1 3 Po w e r Po we r S o u r c e s Selec ting a P o w er Source Use the follo wing table to select a recommended po wer source for the way you plan to use the notebook.
3â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Ta s k Recommended P ower Source W ork in most software applications â Charged batter y pac k in the notebook â Exter nal po wer supplied through one of the f ollowing de vices: â A C adapter â Optional Expansion Base â Optional A uto/Air/A C Adapter â Optional A utomobile P ow er Adapter/Charger Charge or calibrate a batter y pac k in the notebook Exter nal po wer supplie d through one of the f ollowing de vices: â A C adapter â Optional Expansion Base â Optional A utomobile P ow er Adapter/Charger â Optional A uto/Air/A C Adapter à T o prev ent damage to the notebook and aircraft systems, do NO T charge the batter y pac k while y ou are using an A uto/Air/A C Adapter on an aircraft. Install or modify system software or write to an optical disc Exter nal po wer supplie d through one of the f ollowing de vices: â A C adapter â Optional Expansion Base
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â3 S witc hing B etw een Ba t ter y and External Po we r The notebook runs on external po wer whene ver e xternal po wer is a v ailable to the notebook. This conserves the char ge in an inserted battery pack. External po wer can be supplied through the A C adapter or through an optional Expansion Base, Auto/Air/A C Adapter , or Automobile Po wer Adapter/Charger . Because the notebook switches between battery po wer and external po wer according to the av ailability of external po wer: â If the notebook is running on battery po wer and you connect the notebook to external po wer , the notebook switches to external po wer . â If the notebook is running on external po wer (and contains a charged battery pack) and you disconnect the notebook from external po wer , the notebook switches to battery power . A Po wer Meter icon is displayed by def ault in the notif ication area, at the far right of the taskbar . The Po wer Meter icon changes shape whene ver the po wer source changes between battery po wer and external po wer . If the Po wer Meter icon is not displayed in the notif ication area: 1. Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options. 2. Select the Advanced tab . 3. Select the Always show icon on the taskbar check box. 4. Select OK.
3â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r P o w er Control and Li ght Locations The follo wing illustration is provided as a quick reference to the locations of the po wer controls and lights on the notebook. The function of each of these items is summarized in Chapter 1, âHardware. â Instructions for using these items are provided in this chapter . â The po wer/standb y light associated with the po wer/standby b utton and the po wer/standby light on the front of the notebook display the same information. The po wer/standby light associated with the po wer/standby b utton is visible only when the notebook is open; the po wer/standb y light on the front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed. 1 Display switch 4 fn f5 hotke y 2 Po wer/standby b utton 5 Po wer/standby light 3 Po wer/standby light 6 Battery light
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â5 Standb y , H iberna tion and Shutdo wn Ov er vie w s Standb y Standby reduces po wer to system components that are not in use. When standby is initiated, your w ork is sa ved in random access memory (RAM), the screen is cleared, and the po wer/standby lights blink. Sa ving your work before initiating standb y is not usually necessary b ut is a recommended precaution. When you resume from standby , your work is returned instantly to the screen. By default, the system initiates standby after 10 minutes of notebook inacti vity when the notebook is running on battery po wer and after 25 minutes of inacti vity when the notebook is running on external po wer . Fo r information about changing these settings, see the âUsing Po wer Schemesâ section later in this chapter .
3â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Hib er nat i on à CA UTION: If the confi gur ation o f the notebook s yst em is changed dur ing hibernati on , it migh t not be possible to r esume fr om hibernatio n. W hen the notebook is in hiber nation: â Do not add or r emov e a memor y module . â Do not r emov e or r eplace the hard dr i v e . â Do not connec t or disconnect an e xternal de v ice . â Do not inse rt or remo ve a CD , DVD , P C Car d, or digital memory car d . Hibernation sa ves your w ork to a hibernation f ile on the hard dri ve and then shuts do wn the notebook. When hibernation is complete, the po wer/standby lights are turned of f. When you restore from hibernation, your work is returned to the screen where you left of f. Restoring from hibernation takes a little longer than resuming from standby b ut is much faster than returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook. T o determine whether the notebook is in hibernation or turned of f, press the po wer/standby b utton. â If the notebook is in hibernation, your work is returned to the screen. â If the notebook is of f, W indo ws loads. When the notebook is running on battery po wer , hibernation is initiated by def ault after 30 minutes of notebook inacti vity or whene ver the notebook reaches a critical lo w-battery condition. Hibernation is enabled by def ault b ut can be disabled. T o prev ent loss of work during a critical lo w-battery condition, disable hibernation only during a battery pack calibration. » T o verify that hibernation is enabled, select Start > Contr ol Pane l > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hibernate tab . If hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â7 Lea ving Y our W ork If you plan to r esume shortly âInitiate standby for shorter times and hibernation for longer times or for po wer conserv ation. The amount of time a battery pack can support standby or hibernation or hold a charge v aries by notebook conf iguration and the condition of the battery pack. Standby requires more po wer than hibernation. If you plan to r esume within 2 weeks âShut down the notebook. If possible, connect the notebook to external po wer to keep an inserted battery pack fully char ged. If the notebook will be unused and disconnected fr om ex ternal power for mor e than 2 weeks âShut down the notebook. T o extend the life of an inserted battery pack, remo ve the battery pack and store it in a cool, dry location. If an e xternal power supply is uncertain âInitiate hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. A po wer supply might become uncertain because of such conditions as an electrical storm or a nearly dischar ged battery pack. Inter f erence with Driv e M edia T o prev ent the loss of playback or playback quality , do not initiate standby or hibernation while playing a dri ve medium. If standby or hibernation is initiated while a dri ve medium such as a CD or D VD is in use, you might see the warning message âPutting the computer into hibernation or standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue?â If the message is displayed, select No. After you select No: â Playback might resume. - or - â Playback might stop and the screen might be cleared. T o return to your work, press the po wer/standby b utton and then restart the disc.
3â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Standb y , H iberna tion and Shutdo wn Procedur es This section explains the def ault standby , hibernation, and shutdo wn procedures. For information about changing the function of some of the po wer f eatures on your notebook, see the âPo wer Preferencesâ section later in this chapter . The controls and lights discussed in this section are illustrated in in the âPo wer Control and Light Locationsâ section earlier in this chapter . T urnin g th e Notebook On or Off Ta s k Procedure Results T ur n on the notebook. Press the pow er/standby b utton. â Pressing the power/standby button turns on the notebook from standby, hibernation, or shutdown. â P ower/standb y lights are tur ned on. â Operating system is loaded. Shut down the notebook. â In Windows XP Home, select Start > T urn Off Computer > T urn Off. * â â In Windows XP Prof essional, select Start > T u rn Off Computer > Shut down > OK. * â â P ower/standb y lights are tur ned off . â Operating system is shut down. â Notebook is tur ned off . *If the system is unresponsiv e and you ar e unab le to shut down the notebook with this procedure, see the âUsing Emergency Shutdo wn Proceduresâ section later in this chapter . â Depending on your netw ork connections, the T ur n Off Computer bu tton might be called the Shut Down but to n.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â9 Initia ting or Resuming from Standb y Ta s k Pr ocedure Result Initiate standb y . With the notebook on, use any of the f ollowing procedures: â Press the fn f5 hotke y . â Close the notebook. â When the notebook is closed, the display presses the display switch, which then initiates standby. â In Windows XP Home, select Start > T urn Off Computer > Stand By . * â In Windows XP Pr ofessional, select Start > T urn Off Computer > Stand by > OK . * (If standby is not displa yed, press the down arro w , and then select Stand by from the drop-down list.) â P ower/standb y lights b link. â Screen is cleared. Allow the system to initiate standby . No action is required. The system initiates standb y â After 10 minutes of inactivity while running on batter y pow er . â After 25 minutes of inactivity while running on external pow er . â P ower/standb y lights b link. â Screen is cleared. Resume from standby . â Briefly press the power/standb y bu tt on . - or - â Open the notebook. â â P ower/standb y lights are tur ned on. â Yo u r w o r k i s retur ned to the screen. *Depending on your netw ork connections, the T ur n Off Computer b utton might be called the Shut Down but to n. â Depending on yo ur notebook configuration, y ou might also be able to resume from standby b y moving or activ ating a control on an opti onal mouse or b y opening the displa y if the notebo ok was closed while in standb y .
3â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Initia ting or Restoring from Hibern ation Hibernation cannot be initiated unless it is enabled. Hibernation is enabled by def ault. T o verify that hibernation remains enabled, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Hiber nate tab . If hibernation is enabled, the Enable hiber nation check box is selected. Ta s k Procedure Result Initiate hiber nation. In Windows XP Home, select Star t >T urn Off Computer . * Then hold down shift as y ou select the Stand By but to n. In Windows XP Pr ofessional, select Start > T urn Off Computer > Hibernate. * (If hiber nate is not display ed, press the down arro w , and then select Hibernate from the drop-down list.) â P owe r/standby lights are tur ned off . â Screen is cleared. Allow the system to initiate hiber nation. No action is required. If the notebook is running on batter y pow er and hiber nation is enabled, the system initiates hiber nation â After 30 minutes of notebook inactivity . â Whene v er the batter y pac k reaches a critical low-batter y condition. â P owe r/standby lights are tur ned off . â Screen is cleared. Restore from hiber nation. Press the pow er/standby b utton. â â P owe r/standby lights are tur ned on. â Y our wo r k is retur ned to the screen. *Depending on your netw ork connections, the T ur n Off Computer b utton might be called the Shut Down but to n. â If the system initiated hibernation becaus e of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a char ged battery pack before you press the power/standby button. (The system migh t not respond if the drained battery pack is the only power source.)
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â11 Using Em ergency Shu tdo wn Procedur es If the notebook does not respond to the standard W indo ws shutdo wn procedure for your operating system, try the follo wing emer gency shutdo wn procedures in the sequence provided: â Press ctrl alt del. Then â In W indo ws XP Home, select Shut Down > T urn Off . â In W indo ws XP Professional, select Shut down from the drop-do wn list, and then select OK. â Press and hold do wn the po wer/standb y button for at least 4 seconds. â Unplug the notebook from external po wer and remov e the battery pack. For battery pack remo val instructions see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section later in this chapter .
3â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r P o w er Pref erences Using P o w er Sc hemes A po wer scheme controls the amount of po wer the notebook uses while running on external po wer or on a battery pack, and also sets the notebook to initiate standb y or hibernation after a period of inacti vity you specify . » T o select a preset po wer scheme or create a custom po wer scheme, select Start > Control P anel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Set ting a Standb y P as s w ord T o set the notebook to prompt for a password before resuming from standby , select Start > Control Panel > P erformance and Maintenance > P ower Options. Select the Advanced tab, select the check box for Prompt f or password when computer r esumes from standby , and then select OK. For information about other passwords and security features, see Chapter 6, âSecurity . â Set ting Ot her P o w er Pref erence s Y ou can change the function of the po wer/standby b utton, the fn f5 hotke y , and the display switch. By default, when the notebook is on: â Briefly pressing the po wer/standby b utton initiates hibernation. â Pressing the fn f5 hotke y , called the sleep b utton in all Microsoft operating systems, initiates standby . â Closing the notebook presses the display switch, which initiates standby .
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â13 T o change the function of the power/standb y button, the fn f5 hotke y , or the display switch: 1. Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Advanced tab . â T o change the function of the power/standb y button, select a function from the drop-do wn list for âWhen I press the po wer/standb y button on my computer . â â T o change the function of the fn f5 hotkey , select a function from the drop-do wn list for âWhen I press the sleep b utton on my computer . â â T o change the function of the display switch, select a function from the drop-do wn list for âWhen I close the lid of my portable computer . â (The function of the display switch when you open the display is unaf fected by these settings. When you open the display while the notebook is in standby , the display switch turns on the notebook.) 2. Select OK. The hibernate function is a v ailable in the po wer/standb y button, sleep b utton, and display switch drop-do wn lists only if hibernation is enabled. If the hibernate function is not a v ailable on these lists, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Hiber nate tab . Select the Enable Hibernation check box, and then select OK.
3â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Batte ry P ack Cha r g i ng a B att ery P ack T o prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays: â If you are charging a ne w battery pack: â Char ge the battery pack while the notebook is connected to external po wer through the A C adapter . â When you charge the battery pack, char ge it fully . â If you are charging an in-use battery pack: â Allo w the battery pack to dischar ge to about 10 percent of a full char ge through normal use before char ging it. â When you charge the battery pack, char ge it fully . A battery pack inserted in the notebook charges whene ver the notebook is connected to external po wer through an A C adapter or through an optional Expansion Base, Automobile Po wer Adapter/Charger , or Auto/Air/A C Adapter . Ã CA UTION: T o pr e ven t damage to the notebook and air cr aft sy stems, do NO T char ge the bat te ry pack while y ou ar e using an A uto/A ir/A C Ada pter on a n a irc raf t . A battery pack inserted in the notebook char ges whether the notebook is of f or in use, b ut the battery pack charges f aster while the notebook is of f. Charging might be delayed if a battery pack is ne w , has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â15 The battery light displays char ge status: â On: the battery pack is char ging. â Blinking: the battery pack has reached a lo w-battery condition and is not charging. â Of f: the battery pack is fully char ged or not installed. For information about determining the amount of char ge in a battery pack, see the âMonitoring the Char ge in a Battery Packâ section next in this chapter . Monitoring t he C harg e in a Bat ter y P ac k Obtainin g Accurate C harge R eports T o increase the accuracy of battery char ge reports: â Allo w a battery pack to dischar ge to about 10 percent of a full charge through normal use before char ging it. â When you charge a battery pack, char ge it fully . The char ge in e ven a ne w battery pack might be reported inaccurately until the battery pack has been fully char ged at least once. â If a battery pack has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery pack instead of simply char ging it. For information about battery calibration, see the âCalibrating a Battery Packâ section later in this chapter .
3â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Disp lay ing C harg e Reports T o display battery charge information on the screen, use the operating system Po wer Meter feature. T o access the Power Meter display: â Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > P ower Meter tab . - or - â Select the Pow e r M e te r icon, which is displayed b y default in the notif ication area. T o display the Po wer Meter icon if the default setting has been changed, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erformance and Maintenance > P ower Options. Select the Advanced tab, select the Always show icon on the taskbar check box, and then select OK. Po wer Meter displays battery status in both percent and time: â The percent indicates the amount of char ge remaining in the battery pack. â The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pac k continues to pr ovide power at the curr ent level. F or example, the time remaining will decrease if you start playing a D VD and will increase if you stop playing a D VD.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â17 Manag ing L o w- Bat t ery Cond it io ns This section describes default lo w-battery condition alerts and system responses. The default battery light responses cannot be changed. T o change other responses, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erformance and Maintenance > P ower Options, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Id entifying Lo w-Ba tt ery C onditions When a battery pack that is the only po wer source for the notebook reaches a low-battery condition, a text w arning message is displayed, and the battery light blinks. If a lo w-battery condition is not resolv ed and the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack continues to drop, the notebook e ventually enters a critical low-battery condition. If the notebook is on or in standby when a critical lo w-battery condition is reached: â If hibernation is enabled, the system initiates Hibernation. Some unsa ved w ork might be lost. â If hibernation is disabled, th e notebook remains briefly in standby , and then shuts do wn. All unsa ved w ork is lost. Hibernation is enabled by def ault. T o verify that hibernation remains enabled, select Start > Contr ol Panel > Pe rf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hiber nate tab . If hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected.
3â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Resol ving Lo w-B at ter y Conditions à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt pr oblems w hen r est or ing fr om hibernation: If the notebook has r eac hed a cr itical lo w-batter y conditi on and has begun to initiate hibe rnati on , do not re stor e pow er until hibernati on is comple te . When hibe rnati on is complete , the po w er/standb y lights ar e turned o ff . T o resolve a lo w-battery condition: â If external po wer is av ailabl e, connect the notebook to the external po wer source. â If a char ged battery pack is av ailable , shut do wn the notebook or initiate hibernation. Insert a char ged battery pack, and then turn on the notebook. â If no po wer source is a v ailable, sa v e your work. Then initiate hibernation or shut do wn the notebook.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â19 C alibratin g a Ba t tery P a ck When to Calib r ate Even if a battery pack is hea vily used, calibration should be necessary only once a month. Y ou do not ha ve to calibrate a ne w battery pack before f irst use. Calibration does not usually incr ease battery run time, bu t it can increase the accuracy of battery char ge displays, especially under the follo wing conditions: â When the battery pack has been unused for one month or more. â When the notebook has been running primarily on ext er na l po wer (and rarely on battery po wer) for more than one month. â When battery char ge displays report large changes in the percent of po wer remaining within 2 minutes. For e xample, if the Po wer Meter displays 20 percent of a full char ge remaining and then less than 2 minutes later displays only 5 percent of a full charge remaining, the rapid drop in char ge remaining indicates that the battery pack needs calibration. For more information about battery char ge displays, see the âMonitoring the Char ge in a Battery Packâ section earlier in this chapter .
3â20 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Ho w to C alibrate T o calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully dischar ge, and then fully recharge the battery pack. C harging t he Ba tter y P ac k Char ge the battery pack while the notebook is on. T o charge the battery pack: à CA UTION: T o pr e ven t damage to the notebook and air cr aft sy stems, do NO T char ge the bat te ry pack while y ou ar e using an A uto/A ir/A C Ada pter on a n a irc raf t . 1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. 2. Connect the notebook to external po wer through the AC adapter or an optional Automobile Po wer Adapter/Charger or Auto/Air/A C Adapter . (The notebook battery light is on as the battery pack char ges.) 3. Lea ve the notebook connected to e xternal po wer until the battery pack is fully char ged. (The notebook battery light is turned of f.) Disc harging t he Ba tter y P ac k à CA UTION: T o pr e ven t loss o f w ork , save y our w ork be for e beginning an unattended disc har ge pr ocedur e. The notebook must remain on thr oughout the discharge process. The battery pack can dischar ge whether or not you are using the notebook, b ut the battery pack will discharge f aster if the notebook is in use.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â21 If you use the notebook occasionally during the dischar ge process described belo w and ha ve set ener gy-saving timeouts, e xpect the follo wing performance from your system during the dischar ge: â Any unsa ved work from your current session will be lost when the battery pack is fully dischar ged and the notebook is shut do wn. â The system will not turn of f a connected optional monitor . â The system will not decrease hard dri ve speed while the notebook is idle. â System-initiated standby will not occur . T o fully discharge the battery pack: 1. Disable hibernation. T o disable hibernation, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hibernate tab . Then clear the Enable Hibernation check box . 2. Display the settings on the Po wer Schemes tab . T o access the Po wer Schemes tab, select Start > Control P anel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > P ower Schemes tab . 3. Record all settings in the Pl ugged In column and all settings in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 4. Use the drop-do wn lists to set each item in both columns to Ne ver . 5. Select OK. 6. Disconnect the notebook from the external po wer source, bu t do not turn of f the notebook. 7. Run the notebook on battery po wer until the battery pack is fully dischar ged. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the notebook is shut do wn.
3â2 2 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Po w e r Rech arging the B at ter y P ac k 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and maintain the connection until the battery pack is fully recharged and the battery light is turned of f. Y ou can use the notebook while the battery pack is rechar ging, but the battery pack will char ge faster if the notebook is turned of f. 2. If the notebook is turned of f, turn on the notebook when the battery light is turned of f, indicating that the battery pack is fully char ged. 3. Display the settings on the Po wer Schemes tab . T o access the Po wer Schemes tab, select Start > Control P anel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > P ower Schemes tab . 4. Reenter the settings you recorded earlier for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 5. Select OK. Ã CA UTION: T o pre vent an uninte nded batt ery drain and a potenti al los s of w ork w hen the not ebook re aches a c riti cal lo w-battery condition , r eenable hiber natio n after calibr ating the battery pack. T o r eenable hibernati on: Selec t Start > C ontrol P anel > P erformance an d Maintenan ce > P ow er O ptions > Hiberna te tab . Sele c t the Enable Hiber natio n c heck bo x, and then s elect OK .
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â2 3 Con se rvi ng Batt ery P ac k P o w er T o extend the time that a battery pack can run the notebook from a single char ge, use the follo wing battery conserv ation settings and procedures. Cons erving P o w er a s Y ou W ork T o conserve po wer as you work: â Pre vent de vices you are not using from drawing po wer from the notebook. For e xample: â T urn of f wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and close modem applications. â Disconnect from the notebook any e xternal devices that are not plugged into an external po wer source. â Stop or remov e an inserted PC Card. â Disable or remov e an inserted digital memory card. â T urn of f a de vice connected to the S-V ideoâout jack. â Use optional, externally po wered speakers instead of the internal speakers whene ver possible. When you use the internal speakers, minimize system v olume. V olume can be adjusted with the v olume buttons. â Minimize screen brightness. T o decrease screen brightness, press the fn f7 hotke y . T o increase screen brightness, press the fn f8 hotke y . â If you lea ve your w ork, initiate standb y or hibernation, or shut do wn the notebook.
3â2 4 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Po w e r Selec ting P o w er C onser v a tion Set tings T o set the notebook to use less power: â Select a short wait for the screen sa ver and select a screen sa ver with minimal graphics and motion. T o select a screen sa ver and a screen sa v er wait time, select Start > Contr ol Panel > A ppearance and Themes > Display > Screen Sa ver tab, and then follo w the in structions on the screen. â Select or create a po wer scheme that minimizes po wer use. For more information about using po wer schemes, see the âUsing Po wer Schemesâ section earlier in this chapter .
Po w e r Hard war e and So ftwar e Guide 3â2 5 Rep l ac i ng a B a t te r y P a c k à CA UTION: T o pr e v ent lo ss of w ork w hen r emov ing a bat te ry pack that is the only po we r sour ce, sh ut do w n the noteboo k or initiate hiber nation bef or e remo ving the battery pack . (If y ou initiat e hibernati on , do not begin the fo llo w ing pr ocedur e until th e po w er/st andb y lights ar e turned off , indicating that hiber natio n is complete .) Rem o vi ng a B at t er y P ac k Although battery packs v ary by model, the remo val procedure is the same for all models. T o remove a battery pack: 1. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 2. Slide the battery release latch 1 to release the battery pack. 3. T ilt the battery pack 2 and pull it out of the battery bay 3 .
3â2 6 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Po w e r Inser ting a Ba t tery P a ck Although battery packs v ary by model, the insertion procedure is the same for all models. T o insert a battery pack: 1. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 2. Lo wer the battery pack 1 into the battery bay and rotate it 2 until it is seated.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â2 7 Storing a B at ter y P ac k à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt damage to a battery pack , do not e xpose it t o high tem per atur es f or e xtended per iods o f time . If the notebook will be unused and disconnected from external po wer for more than 2 weeks, remov e and store the battery pack. High temperatures, which might be present in parked cars or some workplaces, accelerate the se lf-dischar ge rate of a stored battery pack. T o prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a location that is cool and dry . Calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. Dis posing of a Used B at ter y P a ck à W ARN ING: T o r educe the risk o f fir e or burns , do not disass emble , cr ush , or punc tur e a battery pack; short the ext ernal con tacts on a battery pack; or dispo se of a battery pack in f ire or w ater . Do not e xpose a batte ry pack to high t emper ature s abo v e 60°C (14 0°F ) . Re place only w ith a bat t ery pack appr ov ed f or this comput er . N When a battery pack has r eached the end o f its use ful lif e , do not dispos e of the battery pack in ge ner al hous ehold w as te . F ollo w the local law s and regulati ons in y our ar ea for comput er battery pack dispos al . In E ur ope , dispose of or r ecy cle the battery packs b y using the public collecti on s yste m or b y r eturning the m to HP , y our auth ori z ed servi ce par tner , or their agents.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â1 4 Multim edia Internal Speak ers The internal speakers, identif ied in the following illustration, play sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, dri v e media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external de vice, such as headphones, is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled.
4â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia V olum e Controls Y ou can adjust v olume with the volume b uttons on the notebook or the v olume control software a v ailable in your operating system and in some multimedia applications. The v olume mute button on the notebook ov errides all software volume settings. â T o access the operating system volume controls, select Start > Control P anel > Sounds, Speech, and A udio Devices > Sounds and A udio Devices, and then select the Vo l u m e tab . â T o access additional sound quality settings, such as balance, select the Advanced b utton in the De vice v olume pane. â T o display a volume icon in the notif ication area, select the check box for Place volume icon in the taskbar , and then select OK. â T o adjust volume using the notebook v olume b uttons: â T o decrease volume, press the v olume do wn button 1 . â T o mute or restore volume, press the v olume mute bu tt on 2. â T o increase volume, press the v olume up b utton 3 . When v olume is muted, the mute light (on the volume mute b utton) is turned on. When v olume is rest ored, the mute light is turned of f.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â3 Exter nal Au dio De vices Using t he Audio - O ut (Hea dphone) J ac k à W ARN ING: T o r educe the risk o f perso nal injury , adjust the v olume bef or e putting on headphones . à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt pos sible damage to an e xter nal de v ice , do not plug a monaur al (single sound c hannel) plug into the a udio -out j ack . The audio-out jack, sometimes called a headphone jack, connects optional headphones or externally-po wered stereo speakers. The audio-out jack, identif ied in the fo llo wing illustration, is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. When you connect a de vice to the audio-out jack, use only a 3.5-mm plug. When a de vice is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled.
4â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Using t he Audio -In (Mi crophon e) Jac k The audio-in jack, identif ied in the follo wing illustration, connects an optional monaural (single sound channel) microphone. The audio-in jack is sometimes called a micr ophone jack. It is recommended that you use an electret condenser microphone with a 3.5-mm plug. If you connect a dynamic microphone, the recommended sensiti vity might not be achie v ed.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â5 Exter nal Vid eo De vices Con necti ng a n S - V ideo De v ice (Sel ect Models O nly) Conn ectin g the Au dio The S-V ideoâout jack, av ailable onl y on select models, supports video signals only . If you are setting up a conf igura tion that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a D VD movie on your notebook and displaying it on your tele vision, you need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable a v ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the audio-out (headphone) jack on the notebook. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio-in jack on the external de vice. For more information about the notebook audio-out jack, see the âUsing the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jackâ section earlier in this chapter .
4â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Conn ectin g the Vid eo T o transmit video signals through the S-V ideoâout jack, you need a standard S-V ideo cable, av ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug either end of the S-V ideo cable into the notebook S-V ideoâout jack, illustrated below . Plug the other end of the cable into the S-V ideoâin jack on the external de vice.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â7 Disp lay ing a Vid eo Imag e T o display an image on the notebook display or a video device display , both the notebook and the video de vice must be turned on. » T o switch the image between the notebook display and the video de vice display , repeatedly press the fn f4 hotke y . Pressing the fn f4 hotke y switches the image among the notebook display , any connected displays, and simultaneous display . For more information about fn f4 and other hotk eys, see the âHotke ysâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchPad and K e yboard. â
4â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia CD and D VD Procedure s In serting o r R emo v ing a Di sc Use the follo wing procedures to insert or remo ve an optical disc such as a CD or a D VD. A disc that is playing must be stopped before it can be remov ed. T o stop a disc, press the fn f10 hotke y . â T o insert a discâBe sure the notebook is turned on. Then press the release b utton 1 on the dri ve bezel to release the media tray . Pull the tray outward 2 , place the disc label-side up on the media tray 3 , and then close the media tray 4 . â T o remove a disc while the notebook is turned onâPress the release b utton on the dri ve bezel to release the media tray . Pull the tray outward, remo v e the disc, and then close the media tray . â T o remove a disc while the notebook is turned of f: a. Insert the end of a small object like a paper clip into the release access 5 in the front bezel of the dri v e. b . Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released. c. Pull the tray outward, remo v e the disc, and then close the media tray .
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â9 Using M edia Ac ti vity H otk e y s Media acti vity hotke ys are preset combinations of the fn ke y 1 and 4 of the function ke ys. Y ou can use these hotke ys to control the play of an audio CD or a D VD that is inserted in the optical dri ve. T o control the play of an inserted video CD, use the media acti vity controls in your video CD player application. â T o play , pause, or resume an inserted audio CD or a D VD, press the fn f9 hotke y 2 . â T o stop an inserted audio CD or a D VD that is playing, press the fn f10 hotke y 3 . â T o play the previous track of an audio CD or the pre vious chapter of a D VD that is playing, press the fn f11 hotke y 4 . â T o play the next track of an audio CD or the next chapter of a D VD that is playing, press the fn f12 hotke y 5 . For more information about these and other hotk e ys, see the âHotke ysâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchPad and K e yboard. â
4â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Set ting AutoPla y Pref erence s AutoPlay is the operating system feature that determines ho w the notebook responds when you access f iles on a remov able storage de vice such as a D VD-R OM dri ve, a D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri v e, or a D VD R W/R and CD-R W Combo Dri ve. AutoPlay default settings v ary by notebook model and conf iguration. For e xample, the f irst time you insert a CD or D VD into an optical dri ve and close the tray , the CD or D VD might begin playing or the AutoPlay pop-up windo w might be displayed. If the AutoPlay pop-up windo w is displayed, select your preferences as instructed on the screen. The default AutoPlay settings can be changed. F or e xample, you can set the notebook to display a slide sho w of the pictures on a CD containing digital photographs, begin playing the f irst track of a CD containing music, or display the names of the folders and f iles on a CD containing data f ile s. Y ou can also set the notebook to prompt you for a preference each time you insert a disc or to do nothing when you insert a disc. At many AutoPlay settings, ther e might be a pause of se veral seconds while AutoPlay opens both the disc and the associated disc player application. AutoPlay preferences are not a v ailable for diskette dri ves, b ut can be applied to most other remov able storage devices. AutoPlay preferences can be set for a digital memory card such as a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card, Memo ry Stick, Memory Stick Pro, xD-Picture Card, MultiMediaCard, or SmartMedia (SM) card. T o access AutoPlay settings: 1. Select Start > My Computer . 2. In the Devices with Remo vable Storage group, right-click an item such as a D VD-R OM driv e. 3. Right-click Pr operties. 4. Select the Au t o P l a y tab .
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â11 Protectin g P l a ybac k T o prev ent the loss of playback or playback quality: â For optimal playback quality , sav e your work and close all open applications before playing a CD or a D VD. â Dock or undock the notebook from an optional Expansion Base befor e or after playing a disc, not while playing a disc. Do not initiate standby or hibernation while playing a disc. If standby or hibernation is initiated while a disc is in use, you might see the warning message âPutting the computer into hibernation or standby might stop the playback. Do you w ant to continue?â If this message is displayed, select No. After you select No: â Playback might resume. - or - â Playback might stop and the screen might be cleared. T o return to your work, press the po wer/standby b utton and then restart the disc.
4â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Protectin g a CD or D VD W rite Proce ss à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt los s of w ork and damage to a disc: â Bef or e w r iting to a disc , connect the notebook to a r eliable e xter nal po w er sour ce. Do no t wr ite to a disc w hile the notebook is running on battery pow er . â Bef or e w riting to a dis c, c lose all open appli cations (inc luding sc r een sa v ers and anti vir us so ftwar e) ex cept the disc s oftwar e you ar e using . â Do not cop y dir ectl y fr om a sour ce disc to a des tinatio n disc or fr om a networ k dri v e to a destinati on disc . Instead , copy fr om a sour ce disc or netw ork dr iv e to y our hard dr iv e , and then cop y fr om y our har d dr iv e to the destinatio n disc . â Do not us e the notebook k ey boar d or mo v e the notebook w hile the notebook is w r iting to a disc . The w rite pr ocess is sensiti ve to v ibr ation . Obs ervin g the C op yright W arning It is a criminal of fense, under applicable copyright la ws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, f ilms, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This notebook should not be used for such purposes.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â13 C han ging D VD Region Set tings à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt selec ting a r egio n setting that is not y our permanent pr efer ence, consi der that the r egion s etting on your D VD-RO M dr i ve , D VD/CD-RW C ombo Dri v e , or D VD R W/R and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e can be changed onl y 5 times . â The r egion se tting yo u select the f if th time beco mes the per manent r egion s etting on the DVD-R OM dr iv e or Combo Dr iv e . â The n umber of allo wable r egion change s r emaining on the dr i ve is displa y ed in all softw ar e that can be used t o change a D VD re gion setti ng . Most D VDs that contain copyrighted f iles also contain region codes. The region codes help protect cop yrights internationally . Y ou can play a D VD containing a region code only if the re gion code on the D VD matches the region setting on your D VD-R OM dri ve or Combo Dri ve. If the re gion code on a D VD does not match the region setting on your D VD-R OM dri v e or Combo Dri v e, the message, âPlayback of content from this region is not permitted, â is displayed when you insert the D VD. T o play the D VD, you must change the re gion setting on your D VD-R OM driv e or Combo Dri v e. D VD region settings can be changed in the operating syst em or in some multimedia applications, as described in the follo wing sections. C hangin g D VD Set tings in t he O perating S y s tem T o change D VD region settings in the operating system: 1. Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > System. Select the Hardwar e tab . On the Hardware tab, select the De vice Manager b utton. 2. Select D VD/CD-R OM driv es, right-click the D VD-R OM dri v e or Combo Dri ve for which you w ant to change the region setting, and then select Pr operties. 3. Select the D VD Region tab, and then follo w the instructions on the screen.
4â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia C hangin g D VD Set ting s in a Multimedia Appl icat io n If you use Sonic RecordNo w! or InterV ideo W inD VD Player software, you might f ind it more con venient to change D V D region settings within those applications than to change D VD region settings in the operating system. T o access instructions for changing D VD region settings within â Sonic RecordNo w!, select Start > All Pr ograms > Sonic RecordNow! Then select the Help b utton, identif ied with a question mark icon, on the RecordNo w! console. â InterV ideo W inD VD Player , select Start > All Programs > InterV ideo WinD VD Player . Then select Help on the menu bar of the W inD VD console. Depending on your region and notebook model, multimedia applications such as Sonic RecordNo w! and InterV ideo W inD VD Player might be included with your notebook. For more information about Sonic RecordNo w! and InterV ideo W inD VD Player , see the âMultimedia Softwareâ section later in this chapter .
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â15 Multim edia Sof twar e Multim edia Soft w are Ov er vie w A v ariety of multimedia applications that you can use to play , create, and manage digital media is included with your notebook. Most can be accessed from a desktop icon or from Start > All Programs. Others might be provided on CD. Most multimedia applications include a Help f ile that you can access from the menu bar or from an icon that might be identif ied with a question mark. Most applications also include tutorials. Y ou can obtain customer support for any multimedia application included with your notebook. â Some CDs and D VDs contain player software which is not included with your notebook, such as PCFriendly . If you insert a disc that contains player softwa re which is not included with your notebook, you are prompted to install the player software. If you prefer to use multimedia applications which are included with your notebook, decline the player installation and close the installation windo w . Before using any multimedia application, it is recommended that you re vie w the âSetting AutoPlay Preferencesâ and âProtecting Playbackâ and âProtecting a CD or D VD Write Processâ sections earlier in this chapter .
4â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Selec ting M ultimedia Ap plica tions The multimedia software included with your notebook is determined by your re gion and notebook model. The follo wing list describes the capabilities of some of the multimedia applications that might be included with your notebook. â Microsoft W indo ws Media Player can be used to play CDs and D VDs, copy music to or from CDs, listen to radio stations, and search for and or ganize digital media f iles. â Sonic RecordNo w! can be used to back up data or audio CDs and D VDs, transfer audio files from a CD to a hard dri ve, play movies, and create audio CDs. â InterV ideo W inD VD Player can be used to play D VDs. â W indows Mo vieMaker can be used to create and edit home movies using basic drag-and-drop procedures. â InterV ideo W inD VD Creator can be used to create, edit, and b urn movies to a D VD or video CD or to present a group of still photographs as a slide sho w . W inD VD Creator is provided on CD. F or installation instructions, see the ne xt section, âInstalling W inD VD Creator . â Y our notebook might include additional multimedia applications. Be sure to explore â Y our desktop icons. â The applications listed at Start > All Programs. â The preloaded items that might be a v ailable at Start > All Pr ograms > SW Setup.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â17 Installin g WinD VD Creator If W inD VD Creator is included with your notebook, it is provided on an InterV ideo W inD VD Cr eator CD. W inD VD Creator can be installed only from a D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri ve or a D VD R W/R and CD-R W Combo Dri ve. If your system does not include either of these dri v es, you cannot install W inD VD Creator from an InterV ideo W inD VD Cr eator CD. T o install W inD VD Creator: 1. Connect the notebook to reliable external po wer . 2. Close any open applications. 3. Insert the InterV ideo W inD VD Cr eator CD into the Combo Dri ve. After se veral seconds, an installation wizard is displayed. If the installation wizard does not display , your AutoPlay settings might ha ve been modif i ed. T o proceed with the W inD VD installation, select Start > Run. In the Open text f ield, type: x:\setup.exe (where x is your Combo Dri v e designation), and then select OK. 4. When the installation wizard is displayed, follo w the installation instructions on the screen. For more information about AutoPlay settings, see the âSetting AutoPlay Preferencesâ section earlier in this chapter .
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â1 5 Wir el ess (Selec t Models On l y) If your notebook is equipped with an integrated wireless de vice such as 802.11 or Bluetooth wireless de vices, you ha ve a wireless notebook. â An 802.11 wireless notebook can connect to wireless networks in corporate of fices, your home, and public places. W ireless networks include wireless local area networks (WLANs) or âhotspots. â Hotspots are wireless access points a v ailable in public places, such as airports, restaurants, cof fee shops, hotels, and uni v ersities. â A Bluetooth wireless notebook can connect to other Bluetooth wireless-enabled de vices using a wireless personal area network (P AN). Y our notebook has a b utton that may be used to enable and disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless de vices and an associated light to indicate the state of the wireless de vices. In addition to the wireless b utton and light, your notebook has a software utility , W ireless Assistant, that enables you to control your wireless de vices. W ireless Assistant is a software utility that enables you to turn on and of f th e 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless de vices indi vidually . F or more information on using W ireless Assistant, refer to the âDe vice Po wer Statesâ section in this chapter .
5â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Wir eless Local Area Net w ork (Sel ect Models O nl y) W ith the 802.11 wireless de vice, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories linked b y a wireless router or a wireless access point. â A large scale WLAN, such as a corporate WLAN or public WLAN hotspot, typically use wireless access points, that can handle a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. â A home or small of f ice WLAN typically uses a wireless router , which enables sev eral wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer , and files without additional pieces of hardware or softwa re. W ir eless access point and wir eless r outer are often used interchangeably . Notebooks with 802.11 WLAN de vices may support one or more of 3 IEEE physical layer standards: â 802.11a â 802.11b â 802.11g
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â3 There are 3 popular implementations of WLAN adapters: â 802.11b only â 802.11b/g â 802.11a/b/g 802.11b, the f irst popular WLAN standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g, which came later , also operates at 2.4 GHz but supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps. An 802.11g WLAN de vice is backward compatible with 802.11b de vices, so the y can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps b ut operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. For information on identifying the type of de vice in your notebook, refer to the âIdentifying a WLAN De viceâ section in this chapter .
5â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Set ting Up a WL AN in Y our Home T o set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet in your home, you need the follo wing equipment. The illustration belo w sho ws an example of a completed wireless netw ork installation that is connected to the Internet. This wireless network includes â An optional broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) 1 . â An optional wireless router (purchased separately) 2 . â Y our wireless notebook 3 . As this network gro ws, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. â If you need technical assistance to install your WLAN, contact the router manufacturer or your ISP .
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â5 Using a WL AN Connec tion T o use a WLAN connection: â V erify that all dri vers required b y the 802.11 wireless device are installed and that the 802.11 wireless de vice is correctly conf igured. â If you are using an integrated 802 .11 wireless device, all required drivers are installed and the adapter is preconfigured and ready for use. â If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice, verify that the 802.11 wireless de vice is turned on. When the 802.11 wireless de vice is turned on, the wireless light is turned on. If the wireless light is of f, turn on the 802.11 wireless de vice. Refer to the âDe vice Po wer Statesâ section. â For your home WLAN, v erify that your router is correctly conf igured. For instructions, refer to your router documentation. â Functional range for subseque nt WLAN connections v ary , depending on your notebook WLAN implementation, router manufacturer , and interference from v arying types of walls and other electronic de vices. For more information about using a WLAN connection: â Refer to information from your ISP and the documentation included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment. â Access the information and W eb site links provided at Start > Help and Support. â Refer to the documentation included with your notebook. The T r oubleshooting guide on the Notebook Documentation CD contains a section about wireless LAN de vice problems and resolutions.
5â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Using Wireless Sec urity Features When you set up your o wn WLAN or access an existing WLAN, alw ays ensure that security features are protecting the WLAN. If you do not enable security on your WLAN, an unauthorized wireless user can access your notebook data and use your Internet connection without your kno wledge. The most common security le vels are W i-Fi Protected Access (WP A)-Personal and W ired Equi v alent Pri vac y (WEP). In addition to enabling WP A-Personal or WEP security encryption on the router , you may want to use one or more of the follo wing security measures: â Change the default netw ork name (SSID) and password. â Use a f ire wall. â Set security on your W eb browser . â Enable MA C address filtering on the router . For more information about WLAN security , refer to the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com/go/wireless for details.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â7 In st alli ng Wire les s So ft ware (O p tion a l) Microsoft W indows XP supports WLAN conf iguration with the Zero Client Conf iguration feature. HP provides a separate WLAN conf iguration utility that must be installed if you plan to use Cisco Compatible Extensions. Cisco Compatible Extensions enable wireless de vices to use Cicso-based WLANs. Id entifying a WL AN De vice T o install HP WLAN software for an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice, you need to kno w the name of the inte grated 802.11 wireless de vice on your notebook. T o identify an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice: 1. Display the names of all the 802.11 wireless de vices on your notebook: a. Select Start > My Computer . b . Right-click in the My Computer windo w . c. Select Properties > Hard ware tab > Device Manager > Network Adapters. 2. Identify the 802.11 wireless de vice from the list that is displayed: â The listing for an 802.11 wireless de vice includes the term wir eless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. â If no 802.11 wireless de vice is listed, either your notebook does not hav e an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice, or the dri ver for the 802.11 wireless de vice is not properly installed.
5â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Accessing WL AN Soft w are and Docum entation Y our WLAN software is preloaded on your notebook and is a v ailable in the Software Setup utility . T o install the WLAN software: » Select Start > All Programs > Softwar e Setup, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. (When you are prompted to select the software you w ant to install, select or clear the corresponding check boxes.) The WLAN software is also a vailable as a SoftP aq at the HP W eb site. T o access, download, and install the SoftP aq, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Select Start > Help and Support. - or - â V isit the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com/support: a. Choose your language and region. b . Select the Do wnload Driv ers and Softwar e radio b utton c. Enter your computer model information, and then follo w the instructions provided at the W eb site. â WLAN software is provided in the Network category. To access model information about your computer, refer to the serial number label. The serial number label is on the bottom of the notebook. T o access documentation for your WLAN software: 1. Install the WLAN software as instructed earlier in this chapter . 2. Open the utility . 3. Select Help on the menu bar . T roubleshooting D e vices For more troubleshooting information, visit the HP W eb site ( http://www .hp.com/go/wireless ) or refer to the documentation included with your notebook.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â9 Bluetoot h (Selec t Models O nly) The Bluetooth de vice provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic de vices such as â Network access points. â Computers (desktop, notebook, PD A). â Phones (cellular , cordless, smart phone). â Imaging de vices (printer , camera). â Audio de vices (headset, speakers). The de vices are represented in the Bluetooth for W indo ws software b y graphical icons that resemble their physical features, which makes them easily recognizable and distinguishes them from other classes of de vices. The Bluetooth for W indows softw a re pro vides the follo w ing functions: â Personal Information Management (PIM) item transferâSends and recei v es information files such as b usiness cards, calendar items , notes, and message items to and from another Bluetooth computer or de vice. â PIM synchronizationâSynchronizes PIM data between a computer , PD A, or cell phone using Bluetooth. â File T ransferâSends and receiv es files to and from another Bluetooth computer . â Network access (Personal Area Netw orking Prof ile)âEnables 2 or more Bluetooth de vices to form an ad-hoc (peer -to-peer) network. Pro vides a mechanism that enables a Bluetooth de vice to access a remote network through a network access point. The network access points can be traditional LAN data access points or group ad-hoc networks that represent a set of de vices that are attached only to one another .
5â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) â Dial-up networkingâConnects Bluetooth de vices to the Internet. â Bluetooth serial portâT ransfers data over the Bluetooth link using a virtual COM port. â Hands-FreeâEnables a vehicle-embedded, hands-free unit or a notebook serving as a hands-free unit to establish a wireless connection to a cellular phone a nd to act as the Bluetooth cellular phone audio input and output mechanism. â Basic imagingâProvides a wire less connection between a Bluetooth-enabled camera and other Bluetooth de vices. The camera can be controlled remotely by a notebook, and images can be transferred from a camera to be stored on a computer or to be printed. â Human interface de viceâProvides a wireless connection to other Bluetooth de vices, such as ke yboards, pointing de vices, gaming de vices, and remote monitoring de vices. â FaxâPro vides a Bluetooth connection that enables a notebook to send or recei ve a f ax message using a Bluetooth cellular phone or modem. â HeadsetâProvides a wireless connection between a headset and a notebook or cellular phone . The headset acts as the de viceâ s audio input and output mechanism and increases mobility . For more information about using Bluetooth with your notebook, refer to the W ir eless Documentation CD included with your notebook.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â11 De vice P o w er Sta te s The wireless b utton 1 enables and disables 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth de vices in conjunction with W ireless Assistant. By default, the 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth de vices and wireless light 2 are turned on when you turn on the notebook. â T urning on a wireless de vice does not automatically create a WLAN or connect you to a WLAN. For information on setting up a WLAN refer to the âW ireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only)â section in this chapter .
5â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) The 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth de vices ha ve 2 po wer states: â Enabled â Disabled Y ou can enable and disable the wireless de vices with the wireless b utton. When the wireless de vices are enabled with the wireless b utton, you can use W ireless Assi stant to turn on and off the de vices indi vidually . When the wireless de vices are disabled, you must enable them before you can turn them on or of f with W ireless Assistant. T o view the state of your wireless de vices, place the cursor ov er the W ireless Assistant icon in the notification area, or open W ireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notif ication area. W ireless Assistant displays the status of the devices as on, of f, or disabled. For more information about W ireless Assistant: 1. Open W ireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notif ication area. 2. Select the Help button.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â13 Tu r n i n g O n t h e D e v i c e s â If you want your wireless de vices to be turned on when you turn on your notebook, you must turn them on before you shut do wn or restart. If And Then â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off â Wireless light is off Y ou want to turn on either or both de vices 1. Right-clic k the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices yo u want to turn on. â If the wireless devices are turned off, pressing the wireless button disables both devices. The button does not turn on the devices. â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are disab led* â Wireless light is off Y ou want to turn on either or both de vices 1. Press the wireless bu tton. (The de vices retur n to their pre vious on or off state.) 2. If the wireless de vices are tur ned off , r ight-clic k the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 3. Select the de vice or de vices yo u want to turn on. â Wireless Assistant shows that one de vice is on and the other de vice is off â Wireless light is on Y ou want to turn on either or both de vices 1. Right-clic k the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices yo u want to turn on. *If the wireless de vices are not both on when y ou disable the de vices, pressing the wireless button again returns the de vice s to their pre vious on or off state. Pressing the b utton does not tur n on both de vices.
5â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) T urnin g Of f and Disab ling t he De vices If And Then â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are on â Wireless light is on Y ou w ant to disable both de vices Press the wireless button. Y ou w ant to tur n off either or both de vices 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices y ou want to turn off. â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off â Wireless light is off Y ou w ant to disable both de vices Press the wireless button. â Wireless Assistant shows that one de vice is on and the other de vice is off* â Wireless light is on Y ou w ant to disable both de vices Press the wireless button. Y ou w ant to tur n off both de vices. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices y ou want to turn off . *If the wireless de vices are not both on when y ou disable the de vices, pressing the wireless button again returns the de vice s to their pre vious on or off state. Pressing the b utton does not tur n on both de vices.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â1 6 Sec urity Securit y F ea tur es â Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not pre vent a product from being mishandled or stolen. The security features provided with the notebook can protect the notebook, personal information, and data from a v ariety of risks. Depending on your en vironment, some security features may be unnecessary . It is recommended that you follo w the procedures in this chapter for using â Anti virus software â W indo ws updates â Fire wall softw are
6â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security In addition to the W indo ws operating system security measures, the follo wing table may help you decide which other security features to use. Most of these security features can be conf igured in the Setup utility . For more information, refer to âSetup Utility , â in Chapter 8. T o Protect Against Use This Security Feature Unauthorized use of the notebook â Quic k Lock â P ower-on pass word* Unauthorized access to the Setup utility ( f10 ) HP administrator pass word* Unauthorized star tup from a CD or a diskette De vice Security* Unauthorized access to data â HP administrator pass word â Fi rewal l so ft ware â Windows updates Unauthorized access to the BIOS settings and other system identification inf or mation HP administrator pass word* Unauthorized remov al of the notebook Security cab le sl ot (used with an optional security cable) F or more inf or mation on the security cable slot, ref er to the âOptional Security Cableâ section in this chapter . *This security feature is configured in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is a non-Windows utility accessed b y pressing f10 when the notebook is star ted or restar ted. The procedures f or using the Setup utility to set specific security pref erences are provided in this chapt er . For inf or mation about displa ying system inf or mation and using othe r Setup utilities, ref er to âSetup Utilityâ in Chapter 8.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â3 Sec urit y Pr ef erences in t he Setup Utilit y Most security preferences are se t in Setup utility . Because the Setup utility is a non-W indows utility , it does not support the pointing de vices on your notebook. When using the Setup utility , you must use the ke ys on your notebook to na vigate and make selections. For more details, refer to âSetup Utilityâ in Chapter 8. Q uic kLock The fn f6 hotke y initiates the operating system QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your notebook by displaying the operating system log-on screen. While the log-on screen is displayed, the notebook cannot be accessed unt il a W indows user passw ord or W indo ws administrator password is entered. Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a W indows user passw ord or W indo ws administrator password. F or instructions, refer to the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. â T o initiate QuickLock, press fn f6. â T o exit QuickLock, enter your W indo ws user password or W indo ws administrator password.
6â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security Pa s s w o r d s Most security features use passwords. Whene ver you set a password, write do wn the password and store it in a secure location aw ay from the notebook. â If you forget your po wer-on passw ord and your HP administrator passw ord, you cannot start up the notebook or restore from hibernation. Call Customer Care or your authorized service partner for additional information. â If you forget your HP administrator passw ord, you will not be able to access the Setup utility .
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â5 HP and Windo w s P as s w ords HP security features and W indo ws operating system security features work independently from one another . For e xample, a de vice disabled in the Setup utility cannot be enabled in W indows. Some password options are pro vided b y your HP software, and others are provided b y your operating system. HP passwords and W indo ws passwords are also independent of one another . The follo wing table lists the dif ferent passwords used b y HP and W indows and describes their functions. F or additional information about W indows passw ords, such as screen-sa ver passwords, refer to Start > Help and Support. HP P assw ords Function HP administrator pass word Protects access to the Setup utility . P ower-on pass word Used to access the notebook dur ing star tup and when you restar t the notebook. Windows P asswor ds Function Administrator pass word* Protects Windows administr ator-le v el access to notebook contents. User pass word* Protects access to a Windows user account. T o protect access to notebook contents when the notebook is resumed from standb y , you can set a pass word prompt to displa y . Refer to âSetting a Standby P assw ordâ in Chapter 3. *F or inf orm ation about setting a Wi ndo ws administrator pass word or a Windows user pass word, select Start > Help and Suppor t.
6â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security HP and Windo w s P as s w ord G uidelin es HP and W indows passw ords are not interchangeable. Y ou must use an HP password at an HP passw ord prompt and a W indows password at a W indo ws password prompt. F or e xample: â If a po wer -on password is set, the po wer-on passw ord (not a W indows passw ord) must be entered when the notebook starts up or restores from hibernation. â If you set W indows to prompt for a passw ord before resuming from standby , a W indo ws password (not a po wer-on password) must be entered to resume from standb y . The same word or series of letters or numbers used for an HP password can be used for another HP passw ord or for a W indows password, with the follo wing considerations: â The text of HP passw ords can be an y combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is not case sensiti ve. â An HP password must be set and entered with the same type of ke ys. For e xample, an HP password set with k eyboard number ke ys will not be recogniz ed if it is entered with ke ypad number ke ys. For information about the k e ypad, refer to âK eypadsâ in Chapter 2.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â7 Although you can use the same text for v arious passwords, HP passwords and W indo ws passwords function independently . Even if you plan to use the same text for an HP passw ord and a W indows passw ord, you must set the HP password in the Setup utility and the W indo ws password in your operating system. â Although their names are similar , an HP administrator password and a W indo ws administrator password ha ve dif ferent functions. For e xample, a W indo ws administrator password cannot be used to access the Setup utility , and an HP administrator password cannot provide administrator -lev el access to your notebook contents. Y ou can, ho we v er , use the same text for both passwords.
6â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security HP Adminis trator P a ssw ord The HP administrator password protects the conf iguration settings and system identif ication information in the Setup utility . After this password is set, it mu st be entered to access the Setup utility . The HP administrator password â Is not interchangeable with a W indo ws administrator password, although both can use the same w ord or series of letters, or numbers. â Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. â Must be set and entered with the same type ke ys. For example, an HP administrator passw ord set with ke yboard number ke ys will not be recognized if you enter it with embedded numeric ke ypad number ke ys. â Can include any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is not case sensiti v e. Set ting HP Admini strator P assw ords An HP administrator password is set, changed, or deleted in the Setup utility . T o manage the password: 1. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in hiberna tion, turn the notebook on by pressing the po wer/standby b utton, and then shut down the notebook through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard dri v e is inserted into the notebook (not into an optional docking de vice or e xternal MultiBay).
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â9 3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. 4. Use the arro w ke ys to select Security > Administrator Pas sword , and then press enter . â T o set an HP administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Passw ord and Conf irm New Pas sword f ields, and then press enter . â T o change an HP administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Curr ent Password field, type the ne w password in the Enter New P assword and Conf irm New Passw ord fields, and then press enter . â T o delete an HP administrator password, type your current password in the Enter P assword f ield, press enter 3 times, and then press f10. 5. T o sav e your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and tak e ef fect when the notebook restarts. Enterin g HP Administrator P a ssw ords At the Enter SETUP Passw ord prompt, type your HP administrator password with the same k eys you used to set the password, and then press enter . After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the HP administrator password, you must restart the notebook and try again.
6â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security Po we r - O n P a s s w o r d s A po wer -on password pre vents unauthorized use of the notebook. After this password is set, it must be entered each time the notebook is turned on or restarted. A po wer -on password â Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. â Must be set and entered with the same type ke ys. For example, a po wer -on password set with k eyboard number ke ys will not be recognized if you enter it with embedded numeric ke ypad number ke ys. â Can include any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is not case sensiti v e. Set ting P o w er- O n P a ss w ords A po wer -on password is set, changed, or deleted in the Setup utility . T o manage the password: 1. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in hiberna tion, turn the notebook on by pressing the po wer/standby b utton, and then shut down the notebook through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard dri v e is inserted into the notebook (not into an optional docking de vice or e xternal MultiBay). 3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â11 4. Use the arro w ke ys to select Security > P ower -On password, and then press enter . â T o set a power -on password, type the password in the Enter New Pass word and Conf irm New Passw ord f ields, and then press enter . â T o change a power -on password, type the current password in the Enter Curr ent Password f ield, type the ne w password in the Enter New Password and Conf irm New Password f ields, and then press enter . â T o delete a power -on password, type the current password in the Enter Current Passw ord f ield, press enter 3 times, and then press f10. 5. T o sav e your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and tak e ef fect when the notebook restarts. Enterin g P o wer- On P a ssw ords At the po wer -on password prompt, type your passw ord, and then press enter . After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the notebook and try again.
6â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security De vice Security From the Setup utility De vice Security menu, you can disable the ability of the notebook to start fr om a CD or a diskette dri ve. T o disable or reenable notebook capabilities in the Setup utility: 1. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in hiberna tion, turn the notebook on by pressing the po wer/standby b utton, and then shut down the notebook through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard dri v e is inserted into the notebook (not into an optional docking de vice or e xternal MultiBay). 3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. 4. Select Security > Device Security , and then enter your preferences. 5. Use the arro w ke ys to select an item. Then: â T o disable an item, press f5 or f6 to toggle the f ield for the item to Disable, and then press enter . â T o reenble an item, press f5 or f6 to toggle the field for the item to Enable, and then press enter . 6. When a conf irmation prompt with your preference selected is displayed, press enter to sa ve your preference. 7. T o sav e your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and tak e ef fect when the notebook restarts.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â13 Anti vi rus Softw ar e When you use the notebook for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable your operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally . Anti virus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they ha ve caused. T o provide protection against ne wly discovered viruses, anti virus software must be updated. Norton AntiV irus is preinstalled on the notebook. For information about using and updating the Norton AntiV irus software: » Select Start > All Programs > Norton AntiV irus >Help and Support. For more information about computer viruses: 1. Select Start > Help and Support. 2. T ype viruses into the Search f ield. 3. Press enter .
6â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security Critical S ecurit y Up dates for Win dow s XP Ã CA UTION: Because ne w computer v iruses ar e being detec ted all the time , it is r ecommended that y ou install all c r itical u pdates as s oon as y ou r ecei ve an alert fr om Mic r os oft . Y ou should also run W indow s Update on a monthl y basis to ins tall the lates t r ecommended update s from Micr osoft. A Critical Security Updates for W indows XP disc may have been included with your notebook to provide additional updates deli vered after the computer w as conf igured. Throughout the life of the computer , Microsoft will continue to update the operating system and make these updates a vailable on their W eb site. T o update your system using the Critical Security Updates for W indows XP disc: 1. Insert the disc into the dri v e. The disc automatically runs the installation application. 2. Follo w the on-screen instructions to install all updates. This may take a fe w minutes. 3. Remov e the disc.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â15 Fir e w all Sof t w are When you use the notebook for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you, your notebook, and your data. Fire walls monitor all incoming and outgoing traf f ic on your computer by including features such as logging and reporting, automatic alarms, and user interfaces for conf iguring the fire wall. T o protect your pri v ac y , it is recommended that you use f ire wall softw are. Y our notebook comes with preinstalled f ire wall software. Refer to the online Help in the f ire wall softwa re application for additional information. â Under some circumstances a f ire wall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or f ile sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. T o temporarily solve the problem, disable the f irew all, perform the task that is interfering with the f ire wall, and then reenable the f ire wall. T o permanently resolve the problem, reconf igure the f ire wall.
6â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security Opt io nal Secur it y Cable â Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not pre vent a product from being mishandled or stolen. T o install a security cable: 1. Loop the security cable around a secured object. 2. Insert the ke y 1 into the cable lock 2 . 3. Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot 3 , and then lock the cable lock with the ke y .
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â1 7 Har d w ar e Upg rad e s a nd Repl acem ents De vic e Conne ctio ns Conn ectin g An y P o wer ed De vice T o connect the notebook to an optional external de vice that has a po wer cord: 1. Be sure the de vice is turned of f. 2. Connect the de vice to the jack or jack on the notebook specif ied by the de vice manufacturer . 3. Plug the de vice po wer cord into a grounded A C outlet. 4. T urn on the de vice. â If a properly connected monitor or other display de vice does not display an image, try pressing the fn f4 hotke y to switch the image to the ne w de vice. T o disconnect a powered e xternal de vice from the notebook: 1. T urn of f the de vice. 2. Disconnect the de vice from the notebook.
7â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Con necti ng a USB De v ice USB (Uni versal Serial Bus) is a hardw are interface that can be used to connect an external de vice such as a USB ke yboard, mouse, dri ve, printer , scanner , or hub to the notebook or an optional Expansion Base. A hub is a connecting de vice that can be either po wered or unpo wered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB port on the notebook or to other USB hubs. H ubs support v arying numbers of USB de vices and are used to increase the number of USB de vices in the system. â Po wered hubs must be connected to external po wer . â Unpo wered hubs must be connected either to a USB port on the notebook or to a port on a po wered hub . The 3 USB ports (select models only) on the notebook support USB 2.0-compliant, USB 1.1-compliant, and USB 1.0-compliant de vices.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â3 Con necti ng a 1 3 9 4 De vic e (Sel ect Models On l y) IEEE 1394 is a hardware interf ace that can be used to connect a high-speed multimedia or data storage de vice to the notebook. Scanners, digital cameras, and digital camcorders often require a 1394 connection. Y ou might ha ve to load de vice-specific dri v ers and other software before using some 1394 de vices. F or information about de vice-specif ic software, refer to the de vice documentation or to the W eb site of the device manuf acturer or pro vider . The notebook 1394 port, illustrated belo w , supports IEEE 1394a de vices.
7â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Con necti ng a Com mun icat ion De vic e For information about connecting and using the modem, refer to the modem guides on the Notebook Documentation CD. Basic instructions for connecting the modem and setting up Internet service with an Internet service provider (ISP) are also pro vided in the printed Getting Started guide included with your notebook. For information about using an optional wireless de vice, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless. For information about using the Netw ork Service Boot to connect the notebook to a PXE (Preboot Execution En vironment) serv er during startup, see the âUsing Adv anced Setup Utility Featuresâ section in Chapter 8, âSoftware Updates and Reco v eries and System Software. â For more information about modem, wireless, and netw ork connections, select Start > Help and Support. The Help and Support utility provides communication information that includes instructions, tutorials, and wizards that can help you set up or troubleshoot a v ariety of connections. Modem, network, and wireless troubleshooting information is also provided in T r oubleshooting on the Notebook Documentation CD.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â5 Digital M emor y Cards The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader (select models only) can support: â Memory Stick and Memory Stick Pro â xD-Picture Card â MultiMediaCard â SmartMedia (SM) card â Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Digital memory cards are often used for digital storage on cameras, camcorders, and other handheld de vices. Y ou can set the notebook to open the f iles on a digital memory card in ways you specify . For e xample, you could set a digital memory card to open with a s lide sho w of the photographs it contains. For instructions, see the âSetting AutoPlay Preferencesâ section in Chapter 4, âMultimedia. â The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light and the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot described in the follo wing sections are a v ailable only on models which in clude a 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader .
7â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Using t he 6 -in - 1 Di gital Media Read er Light The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light is turned on when an inserted digital memory card is being accessed. The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light is turned of f when an inserted digital memory card is inacti ve or when the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot is v acant.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â7 Inser ting a Digital Me mory C ard à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt damage to digital me mory card co nnector s: â Use minimal f orce w hen insert ing a di gital memory card in to the 6 -in-1 Digital Media R eader slot . â Do not mo v e or tr ansport the notebook w h ile a di gital memory card is inserted in the 6 -in-1 Digital Media R eader slot . T o insert a digital memory card: 1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently slide the card into the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend outw ard slightly beyond the notebook.)
7â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Remo ving a Digital Memor y Card T o remove a digital memory card: 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are using the card. (T o stop a data transfer , select the cancel b utton in the W indows Cop ying windo w .) 2. Select the My Computer icon on the W indow s Desktop. 3. Right-click the dri v e assigned to the card, and then select Eject. (The card is stopped b ut is not released from the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot.) 4. Slide the card out of the slot.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â9 PC C a rd s à CA UTION: T o pr ese rve support fo r all PC C ar ds , do not install all o f the so ftwar e or an y of the ena blers pr ov ided b y a single PC C ar d manuf actur er . If yo u ar e instru cted b y the documentati on included w ith a P C Car d to install de v ice dr i v ers: â Install onl y the de v ice dr i v ers f or y our operating s ys tem . â Do not install other sof twar e , s uc h as c ar d ser vi ces, socket services, or enabler s, that mi ght also be suppli ed by the P C Car d manufac turer . A PC Card is a credit cardâsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specif ications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). PC Cards can be used to add modem, sound, storage, wi reless communication, or digital camera functions to the notebook. The notebook PC Card slot supports one T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card.
7â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Inser ting a PC C ar d à CA UTION: T o pr ev ent damage to the PC C ar d connector s: â Use minimal f orce w hen inserting a P C Car d into a P C Car d slot. â Do not mo ve or tr ansport the notebook w hile a PC Car d is inse rted. 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently slide the card into the slot until the card is seated.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â11 St oppi ng o r R emo v ing a P C Ca rd à CA UTION: T o p r event loss of work or an un r esp onsiv e s ystem , stop a PC Car d be for e r emo v ing it . â Stopping a PC Card, e ven if it is not in use, conserv es power . T o stop or remov e a PC Card: 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are supported by the PC Card. Then â T o stop the PC Card, select the Safely Remove Hard war e icon in the notif ication area, and then select the PC Card. (T o display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, right-click the taskbar , select Properties, clear the Hide inactiv e icons check box, and then select OK. ) â T o remov e the PC Card, stop the PC Card as described abov e, and then proceed to step 2. 2. Press the PC Card eject b utton 1 . (Y ou might need to press the b utton once to extend the b utton, and then press the button again to release the PC Card.) 3. Gently slide out the PC Card 2 .
7â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Driv es Addin g a Dri v e to t he S y s tem The internal hard dri v e and optical dri ve are standard features of the notebook. The type of optical dri ve v aries by notebook model. An optional dri v e can be added to the system by connecting it, as instructed in the dri v e documentation, to one of the USB ports or to the 1394 port. Hard dri v e capa city can also be added with a microdri ve PC Card or a digital memory card such as a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card. Using t he I DE Driv e Li ght Internal hard dri v e or optical dri ve acti vity is indicated by the IDE (Integrated Dri ve Electronics) light.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â13 C aring for Dri v es à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt damage to the notebook or a dr i v e and loss of wo rk : â Do not r emov e the internal har d dri ve e x cept fo r r epair or r eplacement . F or instr ucti ons, s ee the âReplacing the Inter nal Hard Driveâ se ctio n next in this c hapter . â Electr ostatic dis c harge can damage e lectr onic components . T o pr e ve nt electr ostati c damage to the not ebook or a dri ve , follo w these 2 pr ecautions: (1) Dis char ge your self f r om stati c electr ic ity bef or e handling a dr i ve b y touching a gr ounded metal object and (2) A vo id touc hing the connector s on a dr i ve . F or mor e inf ormation about pr ev enting electr ostati c damage , r ef er to the âElec tr ost atic Disc har ge â chapte r in R egulatory and Safety Notice s on the Notebook Doc umentati on CD . â Ex cessi ve f or ce can damage dri v e connecto rs . When y ou insert a dr i ve , use o nly en ough for ce to seat the dr iv e . â Handle a dri ve car efull y . Do not drop it . â A v oi d e xposing a har d dr i ve or a disk ette to dev ices w ith magnetic f ields . Pr oducts w ith magnetic f ields inc lude video and a udio ta pe er asur e pr oducts , monitors , and speak ers. S ecur it y de v ice s w ith magnetic f ields include air port w alk -through de vice s and sec ur ity w ands. T he airport sec urity dev ices that c heck car ry-on luggage, usuall y w hile it is placed on a conv ey or belt, u se x -ra y s instead o f magnetism and w ill not damage a har d dri ve or a disk ette . â Do not spr a y a dr i ve w ith cleaners . â A v oi d e xposing a dr i v e to liq uids or tem per atur e e xtr emes . â If y ou mail a dr i v e , ship it in pack aging that pr otects it f r om shoc k, v ibr ation , extr eme temper ature s, and hi gh humidity . Labe l the pack age âFRA GILE . â
7â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Replac ing t he Intern al Hard Driv e The hard dri ve in the hard dri ve bay is the internal hard dri ve. Remov e the internal hard driv e only for repair or replacement. Ã CA UTION: T o pr e ven t an unr esponsi ve s y stem and lo ss of w ork , do not begin this pr ocedur e until y ou â Sa v e yo ur w ork , clos e all open appli cations , and shut do wn the notebook . If y ou ar e unsure w het her the notebook is off or in hibernati on , turn the no tebook on and then shut it do wn thr ough the operating sy stem. â Disconnect all e xternal de vi ces connec ted to the notebook . â Disconnect the note book fr om e xter nal po w er and r emo v e the battery pack . For battery pack remo val instructions, see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â T o replace the internal hard driv e: 1. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 2. Loosen the 2 hard dri v e security scre ws.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â15 3. T o remov e the hard dri ve co v er and expose the hard dri ve tab, lift the cov er 1 upward and aw ay from the notebook 2 . 4. T o remov e the hard dri ve, pull upw ard on the hard dri ve tab 1 to release the hard dri v e, and then lift the hard dri ve 2 out of the hard dri ve bay .
7â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 5. T o insert the replacement hard driv e, tilt the connector edge of the hard dri v e 1 do wnward, and then lo wer the hard driv e into the hard dri v e bay until it is seated 2 .
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â17 6. Replace the hard dri v e cov er . a. Place the cov er o ver the hard dri ve bay . b . Slide the co v er 1 slightly to ward the right side of the notebook until the cov er is seated 2 .
7â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 7. T ighten the 2 hard driv e security scre ws.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â19 Memory The notebook has 2 memory slots. Depending on your notebook model, either one or both memory slots might contain a replaceable memory module. Inc reasing M emory Y ou can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook by adding memory modules to v acant memory slots or by replacing installed memory modules. When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard dri ve space reserv ed for the hibernation f ile. Before you increase RAM, it is recommended that you verify that your hard dri v e has enough free space for the larger hibernation f ile. â T o display the amount of RAM in the system: Select Start > Help and Support. â T o display both the amount of free space on your hard driv e and the amount of space required by the hibernation f ile: Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hiber nate tab .
7â20 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts R emo vi ng or Inserti ng a Memory Mo dule à W ARN ING: T o pr e ve nt e xposur e to electr ical sh ock , access only the memory compartment during this pr ocedure . The memo ry compartment, the battery bay , and the har d dri ve ba y ar e the only u ser -accessible inter nal compartments on the notebook . All other ar eas that req uir e a tool to acces s should be opened only b y a service partner . à W ARN ING: T o pr e ve nt e xposur e to electr ical shock and damage t o the notebook , shut dow n the notebook, unplug the po wer cor d, and r emo v e the battery pack bef or e installing a me mory module. à CA UTION: T o pr ev ent elec tr os tatic dis char ge fr om damaging electr onic components: bef or e beginning this procedur e, dis char ge your self of stati c electr ic ity by touc hing a gr ounded metal ob ject . F or mor e info rmati on about pr ev enting elec tr ostati c damage , ref er to the âElectr ostatic Dis char ge â chapt er in Regulat ory and Safety Notices on the Notebook Doc umentati on CD . 1. Sa ve your w ork and close all open applications. 2. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is of f or in hibernation, turn the notebook on and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the notebook. 4. Disconnect the notebook from external po wer . 5. Remov e the battery pack. For instructions, see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â21 6. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 7. Loosen the 2 memory compartment scre ws 1 , and then lift up and remov e the memory compartment cover 2 .
7â2 2 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 8. Remov e a memory module. T o remove a memory module: a. Pull aw ay the retention clips on each side of the module 1 . (The module tilts upward.) b . Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module out of the memory slot 2 . c. T o protect a memory module after remov al, place it in an electrostatic-safe container .
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â2 3 T o insert a memory module: a. Align the ke yed (notched) edge of the module with the ke yed area in the memory slot 1 . If you are inserting a single memory module into a v acant memory compartment, insert the module into the right slot. (The follo wing illustration sho ws a memory module being inserted into the right slot of a memory compartment that contains a second memory module.) b . W ith the module at a 45-de gree angle from the surface of the memory compartment, press the module into the memory slot until it is seated 2. c. Push the module do wnward until the retention clips snap into place 3.
7â2 4 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 9. T o close the memory compartment, align the tabs on the memory compartment cov er with the cover slots on the notebook, and then slide the cov e r o v er the memory compartment until it is seated 1 . 10. T ighten the 2 memory compartment screws 2 . 11. Replace the battery pack, reconnect the notebook to external po wer , and then restart the notebook.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â1 8 Sof t w are Upd ates an d Reco v eri es and S y s tem Soft w are Soft w are Upda tes For optimal notebook performance and to mak e sure your notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install the latest versions of the softw are pro vided with your notebook as they become a vailable. As with any other softw are modif ication, it is strongly recommended that you set a restore point before beginning a software update. F or instructions, see âUsing System Restoreâ later in this chapter . Y ou might f ind that the easiest way to update the software provided with your notebook is to use the softw are update links provided at Start > Help and Support. If you prefer to work from more detailed instructions, the supplementary information in the follo wing sections might help you to â Prepare for any update b y identifying your notebook category , product name, product number , and serial number . â Prepare for a R OM (read-only memory) update by identifying the R OM version currently installed on the notebook. â Access updates at the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site. â Do wnload and install updates.
8â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Preparing for a Soft w are Upd ate If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your network administrator before installing an y software updates, particularly a R OM update. Accessin g Notebook Product Information T o access the updates for your notebook, you might need the follo wing information: â The product category is Notebook. â The product name, product number (P/N), and serial number (S/N) are provided on the Service T ag. The information on the Service T ag is provided at Start > Help and Support, and on the Service T ag label aff ixed to the bottom of the notebook. Accessin g Notebook RO M Inf orma tion T o determine whether an av ailable R O M update is a later RO M version than the R OM version currently installed on the notebook, you need to kno w the v ersion of the currently installed RO M . » T o display R OM information from within W indows, press the fn esc hotke y . In the fn esc display , the version of the system R OM is displayed as the BIOS (basic input-output system) date. On some notebook models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. T o clear the display , press esc. R OM information can also be displayed in the Setup utility . The procedure for displaying R OM information is described in this section. For more information about using the Setup utility , see the âSetup Utilityâ section later in this chapter .
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â3 T o display R OM information in the Setup utility: 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. If the Setup utility does not open with system information displayed, use the arro w ke ys to select the Main menu. (When the Main menu is selected, R OM and other system information is displayed.) 3. T o close the Setup utility without changing any settings, use the arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter . (The notebook restarts in W indows.) Do wnloa ding and Ins talling an Upd ate Most software at the http://www .hp.com/support We b site is packaged in compressed f iles called SoftP aqs. Some R OM updates might be packaged in compressed f iles called RO M P a q s . Most do wnload packages contain a f ile named Readme.txt. A Readme.txt f ile contains detailed descripti ve, installation, and troubleshooting information about the do wnload. The Readme.txt f iles included with R OMPaqs are in English only . The follo wing sections provide instructions for do wnloading and installing â A R OM update. â A SoftPaq containing an update other than a R OM update; for example, an application update.
8â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Do wnloa ding and Installin g a R OM Upda te à CA UTION: T o pre v ent ser ious damage to the notebook or an unsucces sful installati on , do w nload and install a R OM updat e only w h ile the n otebook is connected to re liable e xternal po wer u sing the A C adapter . (Do not do w nload or install a R OM u pdate w hile the notebook is doc k ed in an optional Expansi on Base or r unning on battery pow er .) Dur ing the do w nload and installati on: â Do not unplug the n otebook f r om the A C outlet . â Do not sh ut do wn the n otebook or initiat e standb y or hibernati on . â Do not inse rt, r emov e, connec t , or disconnect an y dev ice , cable , or cor d. Do w nlo adi ng a R OM Updat e: 1. Access the page at the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook. 2. Select Start > Help and Support, and then select a softw are update link. 3. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the R OM update you want to do wnload. 4. At the do wnload area: a. Record the date, name, or other identif ier of any R OM update that is later than the R OM currently installed on your notebook. (Y ou might need this information to locate the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . Record the path to the def ault or custom location on the hard dri ve to which the R OM package will download. (Y ou might need to access the R OM package after it has been do wnloaded.) c. Follo w the online instructions to do wnload your selection to the hard dri v e.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â5 Installing a ROM Upd ate R OM installation procedures v ary . Follo w any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the do wnload is complete. If no instructions are displayed: 1. Open W indo ws Explorer . T o open W indows Explorer from the Start b utton, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > W indows Explor er . 2. In the left pane of the W indows Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation. (The hard dri ve designation is typically Local Disk C.) Then follo w the path you recorded earlier to the folder on your hard dri v e containing the update. 3. T o begin the installation, open the folder , and then double-click the f ile with an .ex e extensionâfor e xample, Filename.ex e. (The R OM update installation begins.) 4. T o complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen repor ts a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded f ile from the destination folder . Do wnloa ding and Installin g a Non -R OM SoftP a q T o update software other than the R OM: 1. Access the page at the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook. 2. Select Start > Help and Support, and then select a softw are update link. 3. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the SoftPaq you w ant to do wnload.
8â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e 4. At the do wnload area: a. Write do wn the date, name, or other identif ier of the SoftPaq you plan to do wnload. (Y ou might need this information to locate the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . F ollo w the online instructions to do wnload the SoftP aq to the hard dri v e. 5. When the do wnload is complete, open W indo ws Explorer . To open W indo ws Explorer from the Start button, select Start > All Pr ograms > Accessories > Windo ws Explor er . 6. In the left pane of the W indows Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation (which is typically Local Disk C) > SWSetup. The destination folder for most do wnloads from the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site is the SWSetup folder . If you donâ t see the do wnload in the SWSetup folder , look in the My Documents folder . 7. In the destination folder , select the name or number of the software package you ha v e do wnloaded. 8. Select the f ile that includes an .ex e e xtensionâfor example, Filename.ex e. (The installation begins.) 9. T o complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen repor ts a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded f ile from the destination folder .
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â7 So ft w are Recov er ies Us in g S y stem R e sto r e System Restore is an operating system feature that enables you to undo harmful changes to your notebook software b y restoring your software to an earlier time, called a r estor e point, when your software w as functioning optimally . Restore points are restorable, benchmark âsnapshotsâ of your application, dri v er , and operating system files. The notebook sets restore points at regular interv als and might set additional restore points whene ver you change your personal settings or add software or hardwa re. Manually setting additional restore points provides additional protection for your system f iles and settings. It is recommended that you manually set restore points â Before you add or extensi vely modify softw are or hardware. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . Restoring to any restore point does not af fect your data f iles. For example, restoring your system softw are to an earlier time will not af fect documents or e-mails that you sa ved after that time. All System Restore procedures are re v ersible.
8â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Set ting a Re store P oin t T o set a system restore point manually: 1. Select Start > Help and Support > System Restor e. 2. Select Cr eate a restor e point, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Res torin g to a Rest ore P oi nt T o restore the notebook to a restore point: 1. Make sure the notebook is connected to reliable e xternal po wer through the A C adapter . 2. Select Start > Help and Support > System Restor e. 3. Select Restor e my computer to an earlier time, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Repairing or Reinstallin g Soft w are If it e ver becomes necessary to repair or reinstall your de vice dri v ers, an application, or your operating system, refer to Appendix B, âSystem Restore, â in the Getting Started guide.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â9 Q uick La unc h But tons Control P anel Y ou can use the Quick Launch Buttons control panel to â Set preferences for the display of the Quick Launch Buttons icon. â Change the size and arrangement of icons and text on your W indows desktop. â Display hotke ys information. â Set b utton assignments for the Easy Access b uttons on an optional external k e yboard. The follo wing sections provide instructions for setting preferences within the control panel. For additional onscreen information about any item on the control panel, select the help b utton in the upper-right corner of the windo w . The help b utton is identified with a question mark icon. Accessing t he Q uic k Launc h Bu t tons Cont r ol Pa n e l Y ou can access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the Start b utton or from an icon that you can display in the notif ication area or W indows desktop. » T o access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the Start b utton, select Start > Control P anel > Quick Launch Buttons.
8â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Set ting Windo w s D esktop Icon Dis play Pref erences T o change the size of the icons on your desktop and of the text displayed with them: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select Start > Control P anel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Zoom tab . 3. Adjust the slider to ward the left and right until your icon display preference is displayed in the illustration abov e the slider . 4. T o sav e your preference and close the display , select OK. If you select a very lar ge icon display and hav e set your operating system to Auto Arrange the icons on your W indows desktop, the icons might ov erlap. T o clear the Auto Arrange setting: 1. Right-click an open area on your W indo ws desktop. 2. Select Arrange Icons By . 3. Select A uto Arrange to remo ve the check and disable Auto Arrange.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â11 Disp lay ing t he Q uick La unc h But tons Icon T o show or hide the Quick Launch Buttons Properties icon in the notif ication area or your W indo ws desktop: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select Start > Contr ol Panel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Advanced tab . On the Adv anced tab you can â Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area. â T o display the icon, select the Show icon on the taskbar check box. â T o hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the taskbar check box. â Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon on your W indows desktop. â T o display the icon, select the Show icon on the desktop check box. â T o hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the desktop check box. 3. T o sav e your preferences and close the display , select OK.
8â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Disp lay ing H otk e y Infor ma tion A hotke y is a preset combination of the fn ke y and another ke y , such as a function ke y ( f1 through f12 ) or the esc key . T o display information about the hotkey functions a vailable on your notebook: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select Start > Control P anel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Function K eys tab . 3. T o close the display , select OK. For more information about hotk e ys, see the âHotke ysâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchPad and K eyboard. â
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â13 Set ting Bu t ton Assignm ents on an External Key b o a r d If you are using an optional external k eyboard that features Easy Access buttons, you can set Easy Access b utton assignments and schemes on the Settings tab . The Settings tab is disabled and hidden by def ault. T o display and enable the Settings tab in the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select S tart > Contr ol Panel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Advanced tab . Then â T o display and enable the Settings tab, select the check box for Allow users to modify b utton assignments on external k eyboard. â T o disable and hide the Settings tab, clear the check box for Allow users to modify b utton assignments on external k eyboard. 3. T o sav e your preferences and close the display , select OK. For information about managing Easy Access b utton assignments and schemes, refer to your ke yboard documentation.
8â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Setup U tility The Setup utility is a R OM-base d information and customization utility that can be used e ven when your operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the notebook and provides settings for startup, security , and other preferences. Step-by-step instructions for setting specif ic preferences are included by topic earlier in this guide. F or example, procedures for setting password and other security preferences are pro vided in Chapter 6, âSecurity . â Openin g th e Setup Utilit y T o open the Setup Utility: 1. T urn on or restart the notebook in W indows. 2. Before W indo ws opens and while the âPress <F10> to enter setupâ prompt is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen, press f10.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â15 C hangin g th e Langua ge of t he Setup U tility The follo wing procedure explains ho w to change the language of the Setup utility . If the notebook is not in the Setup utility , begin at step 1. If the notebook is in the Setup utility , begin at step 2. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arro w ke ys to select the Advanced menu. 3. Press f5 or f6 (or use the arro w ke ys) to select a language, and then press enter . 4. When a conf irmation prompt with your preference selected is displayed, press enter to sa ve your preference. 5. T o set your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are in ef fect when the notebook restarts in W indows. Naviga ting and S elec ting in t he Setup U tility Because the Setup utility is not W indows-based, it does not support the T ouchPad. Na vigation and selection are b y ke ystroke. â T o choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow k e ys. â T o choose an item in a drop-down list or to toggle a f ield, for example an Enable/Disable f ield, use either the arrow ke ys or f5 or f6. â T o select an item, press enter . â T o close a text box or return to the menu display , press esc. T o display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup utility is open, press f1.
8â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Disp layi n g S y s tem Inf orma tion The follo wing procedure explains ho w to display system information in the Setup utility . If the Setup utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup utility is open, be gin at step 2. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. Access the system information on the Main and Advanced menus. â T o display most of the system information av ailable in the Setup utility , use the arro w ke ys to select the Main menu. â T o display video memory information, use the arrow k e ys to select the Advanced menu. 3. T o close the Setup utility without changing any settings, use the arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter . (The notebook restarts in W indows.)
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â17 Re s toring Default Set tin gs in t he Setup Utilit y The follo wing procedure explains ho w to restore the Setup utility default settings. If the notebook is not in the Setup utility , begin at step 1. If the notebook is in the Setup utility , begin at step 2. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. Press f10. 3. When the Setup Conf irmation is displayed, press enter to sa ve your preferences. 4. T o set your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. The Setup utility default settings are set when you e xit the Setup utility and are in ef fect when the notebook restarts. Identif ication information, including R OM version information, is retained.
8â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Using Adv an ced Setup U tility Features This guide describes the Setup utility features recommended for all users. For more information about the Setup utility features recommended for adv anced users only , refer to the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. The Setup utility features a v ailable for adv anced users include a hard dri ve self-test, a Netw ork Service Boot, and settings for boot order preferences. The â<F12> to boot from LANâ me ssage that is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen each time the notebook is started or restarted in W indo ws or restored from hibernation is the prompt for a Network Service Boot. The âPress <ESC> to change boot orderâ message that is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen each time the notebook is started or restarted in W indo ws or restored from hibernation is the prompt to change the boot order .
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â19 C losing t he Setup U tility Y ou can close the Setup utility with or without sa ving changes. â T o close the Setup utility a nd sav e your changes from the current session, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. - or - â If the Setup utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display . Then use arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Sa ving Changes, and then press enter . When you use the f10 procedure, you are of fered an option to return to the Setup utility . When you use the Exit Saving Changes procedure, the Setup utility closes when you press enter . â T o close the Setup utility w ithout saving your changes from the current session: If the Setup utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display . Then use arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter . After the Setup utility closes, the notebook restarts in W indow s.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Aâ1 A Spec ifi cat ions Op er atin g En vironment The operating en vironment information in the following table might be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook in extreme en vironments. Fac to r Metric U. S . T emperature Operating 10°C to 35°C 50°F to 95°F Nonoperating -20°C to 60°C -4°F to 140°F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating 10% to 90% 10% to 90% Nonoperating 5% to 95% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressuri z ed) Operating -15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft
Aâ2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Spe c ific atio ns Rated Inp ut P o w er The po wer information in this section might be helpful if you plan to tra vel internationally with the notebook. The notebook operates on DC po wer , which can be supplied by an A C or a DC po wer source. Although the notebook can be po wered from a stand-alone DC po wer source, it is strongly that the notebook be po wered only with an A C adapter or DC po wer cord supplied with or approv ed for an HP notebook. The notebook is capable of accepting DC po wer within the follo wing specif ications. This product is designed for IT po wer systems in Norway with phase-to-phase v oltage not exceeding 230 Vrms. Input P ower Rating Operating v oltage 18.5V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W Operating current 3.5 A
Spe c ific atio ns Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Aâ3 Expansion P or t Inp ut/Ou tpu t Signals The expansion port signal information in this section might be helpful if you plan to use an optional expansion product that connects to the expansion port on your notebook. This port is illustrated in the âLeft-Side Componentsâ section of Chapter 1, âHardware. â Optional expansion products that connect to the notebook through the expansion port might include an Expansion Base or an HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable. The follo wing table identif ies the input and output signals supported by the e xpansion port on your notebook. Feature Support USB 2.0 Ye s 10/100 Ether net Ye s Gigabit Ether net No IEEE 1394 (4-pin por t) Ye s Consumer IR (f or optional remote control only) Ye s P ower inputs 65 W Composite TV Ye s S-Video TV Ye s Component TV No S/PDIF audio Ye s DV I No Headphone/speaker audio-out Ye s Microphone audio-in Ye s
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â15, 7â3 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light 1â15 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot 1â15, 7â5 A AC adapter 1â19 AC power vs. battery power 3â1 administrator password 6â5 airport security devices 7â13 altitude specifications Aâ1 antennae 1â8 antivirus software 6â13 application recovery disc 1â20 applications key, Windows 1â2 applications, reinstalling or repairing 1â20 applications. See software audio-in (microphone) jack 1â11 , 4â4 audio-out (headphone) jack 1â11 , 4â3 Auto/Air/AC Adapter 3â2, 3â14 Automobile Power Adapter/Charger 3â2, 3â14 AutoPlay 4â10 B base, docking. See Expansion Base battery bay 1â18, 1â21 battery light displaying charge status 3â15 , 3â17 identifying 1â10 , 3â4 battery pack battery power vs. AC power 3â1 calibrating 3â19 charging 3â14 conserving power 3â23 diagnostic information 8â16 disposing of 3â27 inserting 3â26 low-battery conditions 3â17 monitoring charge 3â15 removing 3â25 storing 3â27
Inde xâ2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x battery pack release latch 1â18 , 3â25 bays battery 1â18, 1â21 hard drive 1â18 See also compartments BIOS information, displaying 6â2 , 8â2 Bluetooth device, wireless light 1â6, 1â9 Bluetooth label 1â21 boot order 8â18 buttons display release 1â11 Easy Access 8â13 mute 1â7, 4â2 PC Card eject 1â14, 7â11 power 1â4, 3â8, 3â12 TouchPad 1â3 volume 1â7 , 4â2 wireless 1â6, 1â7 See also battery pack release latch; display switch; keys C cable lock, security 6â16 cables audio 4â5 HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable 2â9 modem 1â19 network 1â13 S-Video 4â5 See also power cord calibration, battery 3â19 camcorder connecting 7â3 digital memory cards 7â5 camera connecting 7â3 digital memory cards 7â5 caps lock light 1â5 card and socket services, PC Card 7â9 card. See digital memory cards; memory; PC Card category view, Windows XP 2â3 CDs audio, hotkeys 4â9 copying 4â12 copyright warning 4â12 creating 4â12 inserting, removing 4â8 multimedia applications 4â16 playing 4â9, 4â11, 4â15 setting AutoPlay preferences 4â10 writing to 4â12 See also recovery discs Certificate of Authenticity label 1â21 classic view, Windows 2â3 Compaq administrator password 6â5 compartments memory 1â17, 7â19 Mini PCI 1â17 See also bays
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ3 composite video 2â9 Computer Setup, setting security preferences 6â3 connectors drive 7â13 power 1â13 See also jacks; ports conservation, power 3â23 cord, power identifying 1â19 See also cables country-specific modem adapter 1â19 critical low-battery condition 3â17 D default settings, restoring Setup utility 8â17 desktop, Windows, setting icon display preferences 8â10 device disabling 6â12 device security 6â12 device, connecting powered 7â1 digital memory cards 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 7â5 inserting 7â7 removing 7â8 setting AutoPlay preferences 4â10 types supported 7â5 disc, optical. See CDs; DVDs diskette affected by airport security 7â13 protecting playback 3â7 display release button 1â11 display switch identifying 1â4 , 3â4 setting preferences 3â12 display, internal controlling brightness 2â11 switching image 2â9 driver recovery disc 1â20 drivers, reinstalling or repairing 1â20 drives adding to system 7â12 affected by airport security 7â13 avoiding standby and hibernation while using discs, diskettes 3â7, 4â11 boot order 8â18 caring for 7â13 IDE drive light 7â12 shipping 7â13 USB 7â2 See also CDs; DVDs; hard drive DVDs changing regional settings 4â13 creating 4â17 hotkeys 4â9 inserting, removing 4â8 multimedia applications 4â16
Inde xâ4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x playing 4â9 , 4â11 , 4â15 setting AutoPlay preferences 4â10 writing to 4â12 See recovery discs E Easy Access buttons 8â13 eject buttons optical drive 4â8 PC Card 7â11 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 7â13 , 7â20 emergency shutdown procedures 3â11 enablers, PC Card 7â9 environmental specifications Aâ1 , Aâ2 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 7â13 , 7â20 exhaust vent 1â12, 1â18 Expansion Base as power source 3â2 docking, undocking while using disc, diskette 4â11 expansion port on notebook 1â13 monitor port 2â9 USB support 7â2 expansion port 1â13, Aâ3 external numeric keypad 2â17 F F12 to boot from LAN message 8â18 firewall software 6â15 flash memory cards 7â5 fn key 1â2 function keys ( f1, f2, etc.) 2â5 G Getting Started 1â20 H hard drive affected by airport security 7â13 displaying amount of free space on 7â19 replacing internal 7â14 self-test 8â18 space on, required for hibernation file 7â19 hard drive bay identifying 1â18 replacing hard drive 7â14 headphone (audio-out) jack 1â11 , 4â3 headphones 4â3 Help and Support Center 2â7 hibernation avoiding when using discs, diskettes 3â7, 4â11 defined 3â6 enabling/disabling 3â6 identifying 7â14 initiated during critical low-battery condition 3â17 initiating 3â10 restoring from 3â6, 3â10 setting preferences 3â12 when to use 3â6 hibernation file 3â6, 7â19
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ5 hotkey commands access Help and Support Center 2â7 control media activity (play, pause, stop, etc.) 2â12 , 4â9 , 8â2 decrease display brightness 2â11 display system information 2â13 increase display brightness 2â11 initiate QuickLock 2â11 initiate standby 3â9, 3â12 open Internet Explorer 2â8 open print options window 2â8 Quick Reference 2â6 switch image 2â9 hotkeys displaying functions on the screen 8â12 identifying 1â1 , 2â5 procedures 2â7 Quick Reference 2â6 using with external keyboard 2â7 HP administrator password 6â5 HP password 6â5 HP password guidelines 6â6 HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable 2â9 hub, USB 7â2 humidity specifications Aâ1 I icons on Windows desktop, setting display preferences 8â10 IDE drive light 1â10, 7â12 identifying components bottom 1â17 front 1â9 left-side 1â12 rear 1â12 right-side 1â15 top 1â1 IEEE 1394 port 1â15, 7â3 Internet Connection wizard 2â8 Internet Explorer 2â8 InterVideo WinDVD Creator 4â16 InterVideo WinDVD Player 4â14 , 4â16 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 1â11 , 4â4 audio-out (headphone) 1â11 , 4â3 RJ-11 (modem) 1â13 RJ-45 (network) 1â13 S-Videoâout 1â16, 4â5 See also connectors; ports K keyboard, external 2â7, 8â13 keypad, embedded numeric identifying 1â2 , 2â14 procedures 2â15
Inde xâ6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x keypad, external numeric, procedures 2â17 keys fn 1â2 function ( f1, f2, etc.) 1â1 hotkeys 1â1, 2â5 keypad 1â2 , 2â14 num lock 2â15 scroll lock 2â7 shift 2â16, 3â10 Windows applications 1â2 Windows logo 1â1 See also buttons; display switch L labels Bluetooth 1â21 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 1â21 Modem Approval 1â21 Regulatory 1â21 Service Tag 1â21 wireless certification 1â21 WLAN 1â21 language, changing in Setup utility 8â15 latch, battery pack release 1â18 See also buttons; display switch lights 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 1â15 battery 1â10, 3â15 , 3â17 caps lock 1â5 IDE drive 1â10, 7â12 mute 1â5 , 4â2 num lock 1â6, 2â15 power/standby 1â9 , 3â8 power/standby button 1â5 TouchPad 2â1 wireless 1â9 wireless button 1â6 lock, security cable 1â16, 6â16 lock-up, system 3â11 low-battery condition 3â17 M Media Player, Windows 4â16 media, digital 7â5 memory displaying amount of 2â7, 7â19 increasing RAM 7â19 memory card reader 7â5 memory compartment 1â17, 7â21 memory module, removing or inserting 7â20 Memory Reader light 7â6 Memory Reader slot 7â6 Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro 7â5 microphone 4â4 microphone (audio-in) jack 1â11 , 4â4 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 1â21 Mini PCI compartment 1â17
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ7 model, identifying notebook 2â7 , 8â2 modem country-specific adapter 1â19 documentation 7â4 modem (RJ-11) jack 1â13 Modem Approval label 1â21 modem cable 1â19 monitor connecting 7â1 switching image 2â9, 7â1 monitor port 1â13 mouse, external setting preferences 2â3 USB 7â2 MultiMediaCard 7â5 mute button 1â7, 4â2 mute light 1â5, 4â2 N network (RJ-45) jack 1â13 network cable 1â13 network documentation 7â4 Network Service Boot 8â18 Norton AntiVirus 6â13 notebook model, family, type, and serial number 2â7, 8â2 num lock key 2â15 num lock light 1â6, 2â15 numeric keypad. See keypad, external numeric; keypad, embedded numeric O operating environment specifications Aâ1 operating system Internet Connection wizard 2â8 loading 3â8 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 1â21 passwords 6â5 Product Key 1â21 security 6â2 shutting down 3â8, 3â11 operating system recovery disc 1â20 operating system, Windows reinstalling or repairing 1â20 optical disc. See CDs; DVDs optical drive identifying 1â15 inserting, removing disc 4â8 See also CDs; drives; DVDs P passwords forgetting 6â4 HP 6â5 HP guidelines 6â6 power-on 6â10 QuickLock 2â11 standby 3â12
Inde xâ8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x using 6â4 Windows 6â5 Windows administrator 2â11 Windo ws guidelines 6â6 Windows user 2â11 passwords, coordinating 6â6 PC Card configuring 7â9 inserting, removing 7â10 stopping 7â11 types supported 7â9 PC Card eject button 1â14, 7â11 PC Card slot 1â14, 7â10 PCFriendly 4â15 pointing device 2â2 ports 1394 1â15 , 7â3 expansion port 1â13 external monitor 1â13, 2â9 USB 1â13, 1â15 , 7â2 See also connectors; jacks power conserving 3â6, 3â23 control and light locations 3â4 schemes 3â12 setting preferences 3â12 sources 3â1 switching between AC and battery 3â3 See also battery pack; hibernation; shutdown procedures; standby power connector 1â13 power cord external device 7â19 notebook 1â19 See also cables Power Meter icon 3â3, 3â16 power/standby button default functions 3â8 identifying 1â4 , 3â4 resetting notebook with 3â11 setting preferences 3â12 power/standby light 1â5, 1â9 , 3â8 powered device, connecting 7â1 power-on password 6â5 Press ESC to change boot order message 8â18 Product Key 1â21 product name and number, notebook 1â21, 2â7 projector connecting 1â13, 7â1 switching image 2â9 PXE server 7â4 Q QuickLock 2â11 QuickLock hotkey 6â3 R RAM (random access memory) 7â19 reader, memory card 7â5 recovery discs 1â20 regional settings for DVDs 4â13
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ9 regulatory information Modem Approval label 1â21 Regulatory label 1â21 wireless certification labels 1â21 reinstalling or repairing software 1â20 release latch, battery pack 1â18 , 3â25 reset (emergency shutdown procedures) 3â11 restore point 8â7 RJ-11 (modem) jack 1â13 RJ-45 (network) jack 1â13 ROM determining current version of 8â2 downloading and installing 8â4 obtaining updates 8â3 ROMPaq 8â3 S scanner 7â3 screen saver 3â24 scroll lock key 2â7 scrolling regions, TouchPad 1â3 , 2â2 Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card 7â5 security cable lock, connecting 6â16 security cable slot 1â16 security features 6â1 security features on notebook 6â3 serial number, notebook 1â21 , 2â7 series, notebook 8â2 Service Tag 1â21 Setup utility changing language 8â15 displaying system information 8â16 navigation and selection 8â15 Network Service Boot 7â4 , 8â18 opening 8â14 restoring default settings 8â15 , 8â17 setting security preferences 6â3 shift key embedded numeric keypad function 2â16 hibernation function 3â10 shutdown procedures 3â8 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 7â5 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot 7â6 sleep button 2â10 Sleep. See standby slots 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 1â15, 7â5 memory 7â19 PC Card 1â14 security cable 1â16
Inde xâ10 Hard war e and So ftwar e Guide Inde x SmartMedia (SM) card 7â5 socket services, PC Card 7â9 SoftPaq 8â3, 8â5 software antivirus 6â13 AutoPlay 4â10 firewall 6â2, 6â15 Internet Connection wizard 2â8 multimedia applications 4â13 , 4â15 Power Meter 3â16 reinstalling or repairing 1â20 repair, reinstallation documentation 8â8 ROMPaq 8â3 security features 6â1 Setup utility 8â14 SoftPaq 8â3 System Restore 8â7 updating 8â1 Sonic RecordNow! 4â14, 4â16 speakers external 4â3 internal 1â11, 4â1 specifications operating environment Aâ1 rated input power Aâ2 standby avoiding when using discs, diskettes 3â7, 4â11 initiated during critical low-battery condition 3â17 initiating 3â9 password 3â12 power/standby light 1â5, 1â9 resuming from 3â9 setting preferences 3â12 stereo speakers external 4â3 internal 1â11, 4â1 S-Videoâout jack 1â16, 4â5 switch, display identifying 1â4 , 3â4 setting preferences 3â12 system information, displaying 8â2, 8â16 system lock-up 3â11 System Restore 8â7 T telephone jack (RJ-11 jack) 1â13 television connecting audio 4â3 connecting video 4â6 temperature specifications Aâ1 storage, battery pack 3â27 1394 port 1â15, 7â3 TouchPad 1â3, 2â1 traveling with notebook battery pack temperature considerations 3â27 environmental specifications Aâ1
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Indexâ11 Modem Approval label 1â21 wireless certification labels 1â21 turning off notebook 3â8, 3â11 turning on notebook 3â8 tutorials 2â7, 4â15, 7â4 U unresponsive system, emergency shutdown procedures 3â11 USB devices, connecting 7â2 USB ports, identifying 1â13, 1â15 user passwords 6â5 V VCR connecting audio 4â3 connecting video 4â5 vents, exhaust 1â12, 1â18 video device connecting 4â5, 7â1 turning on or off 4â7 viruses, antivirus software 6â13 volume buttons 1â7 volume, adjusting 4â2 W Windows applications key 1â2 Windows category vs. Windows classic view 2â3 Windows desktop, setting icon display preferences 8â10 Windows firewall 6â2 Windows logo key 1â1 Windows Media Player 4â16 Windows MovieMaker 4â16 Windows password guidelines 6â6 WinDVD Creator 4â16 WinDVD Player 4â16 wireless types of WLAN adapters 5â7 wireless local area network (WLAN) 5â7 WLAN software 5â8 wireless button 1â7, 5â11 wireless certification label 1â21 wireless device antennae 1â8 wireless device documentation 7â4 wireless LAN device Mini PCI compartment 1â17 wireless button 1â7 wireless light 1â6, 1â9 wireless light 1â6, 1â9 WLAN identifying devices 5â7 software 5â8 troubleshooting 5â8 types 5â7 WLAN label 1â21 X xD-Picture Card 7â5
© Copyright 2004 He wlett-Packard Dev elopment Company , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. Adobe and Acrobat ar e trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. HP Note book Series Fi r s t Ed i t io n D e c e m b e r 2 0 0 4 R ef er ence Number : z e2000 Document P a rt Numb er : 3 7 5 80 2 -0 01 Hardware and Software Guide
Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide iii Cont ent s 1 Hardware Top Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â1 TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â3 Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 Wireless and Volume Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â7 Antennae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â8 Front Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â9 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â9 Speakers, Jacks and Display Release Button. . . . . . 1â11 Rear Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â12 Left-Side Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â13 Ports and Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â13 PC Card Slot and Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â14 Right-Side Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â15 Bottom Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â17 Mini PCI and Memory Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 1â17 Bays, Battery Latch and Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â18 Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â19 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â19 Optical Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â20 Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â21
i v Hard war e and So ft w are Guide Cont ent s 2 TouchPad and Keyboard TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Identifying TouchPad Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using the TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Setting TouchPad Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Identifying Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Hotkey Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6 Using Hotkey Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 Using Hotkey Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â14 Using the Embedded Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . 2â14 Using an External Numeric Keypa d . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â17 3P o w e r Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 Selecting a Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 Switching Between Battery and External Power . . . . 3â3 Power Control and Light Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â4 Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Overviews . . . . . . . 3â5 Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â5 Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â6 Leaving Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â7 Interference with Drive Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â7 Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . 3â8 Turning the Notebook On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â8 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â9 Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation . . . . . . . . . 3â10 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . 3â11 Power Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 Using Power Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 Setting a Standby Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 Setting Other Power Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12
Cont ent s Hard war e and So ftwar e Guide v Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 Charging a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . 3â15 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â17 Calibrating a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â19 Conserving Battery Pack Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â23 Replacing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â25 Storing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â27 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â27 4 Multimedia Internal Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 Volume Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 External Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â3 Using the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack . . . . . . . . . . 4â3 Using the Audio-In (Microphone) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 External Video Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 Connecting an S-Video Device (Select Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 Displaying a Video Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7 CD and DVD Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â8 Inserting or Removing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â8 Using Media Activity Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â9 Setting AutoPlay Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â10 Protecting Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â11 Protecting a CD or DVD Write Process . . . . . . . . . 4â12 Observing the Copyright Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â12 Changing DVD Region Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â13 Multimedia Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â15 Multimedia Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â15 Selecting Multimedia Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â16 Installing WinDVD Creator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â17
v i Hard war e and So ft w are Guide Cont ent s 5 Wireless (Select Models Only) Wireless Local Area Network ( Select Models Only) . . . 5â2 Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4 Using a WLAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5 Using Wireless Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 Installing Wireless Software (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 Troubleshooting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 Bluetooth (Select Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 Device Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 Turning On the Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 Turning Off and Disabling the Devices . . . . . . . . . . 5â14 6 Security Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â1 Security Preferences in the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â3 QuickLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â3 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â4 HP and Windows Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 HP and Windows Password Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 6â6 HP Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â8 Setting HP Administrator Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â8 Entering HP Administrator Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . 6â9 Power-On Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â10 Setting Power-On Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â10 Entering Power-On Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â11 Device Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â12 Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â13 Critical Security Updates for Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . 6â14 Firewall Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â15 Optional Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â16
Cont ent s Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide v ii 7 Hardware Upgrades and Replacements Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â1 Connecting Any Powered Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â1 Connecting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â2 Connecting a 1394 Device (Select Models Only) . . . 7â3 Connecting a Communication Devi ce . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â4 Digital Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â5 Using the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader Light . . . . . . 7â6 Inserting a Digital Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â7 Removing a Digital Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â8 PC Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â9 Inserting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â10 Stopping or Removing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â11 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Adding a Drive to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Using the IDE Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Caring for Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â13 Replacing the Internal Hard Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â14 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â19 Increasing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â19 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . . . . . . . 7â20 8 Software Updates and Recoveries and System Software Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â1 Preparing for a Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â2 Downloading and Installing an Up date . . . . . . . . . . . 8â3 Software Recoveries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â7 Using System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â7 Repairing or Reinstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â8 Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9 Accessing the Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9
v iii Hard war e and So ft w are Guide Cont ent s Displaying Hotkey Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â12 Setting Button Assignments on an External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â13 Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â14 Opening the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â14 Changing the Language of the Setup Utility . . . . . . 8â15 Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . . . . . 8â15 Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â16 Restoring Default Settings in the Setup Utility . . . . 8â17 Using Advanced Setup Utility Features . . . . . . . . . 8â18 Closing the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â19 A Specifications Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aâ1 Rated Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aâ2 Expansion Port Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aâ3 Index
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â1 1 Ha r d w ar e To p C o m p o n e n t s Keys Component Description 1 Function ke ys (12) P erform system and application tasks. When combined with fn, the function ke ys perform additional tasks as hotke ys. 2 Windows logo k e y Displa ys the Microsoft® Windows® Star t menu. (Continued)
1â2 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e 3 fn key Combines with other ke ys to perform system tasks. F or example , pressing fn f7 decreases screen brightness. 4 K eypad k eys (15) Can be used like the k eys on an e xter nal n umeric ke ypad. 5 Windows applications key Displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . Component Description
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â3 To u c h P a d Component Description 1 T ouchP ad* Mov es the pointer . 2 Left T ouchP ad button* Functions like the left b utton on an e xter nal mouse . 3 Right T ouchP ad button* Functions like the right bu tton on an e xter nal mouse . 4 T ouchP ad ver tical scrolling region* Scrolls upward or do wnwa rd. *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf or mation about changing the functions of T ouchP ad components, see the âSetting T ouchP ad Pref erencesâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchP ad and K eyboard. â
1â4 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Po we r C o n t r o l s Component Description 1 Displa y s witch* If the notebook is clos ed while on, initiates standby . 2 P ower/standb y button* When the notebook is â Off , press to tur n on the notebook. â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standby , briefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. â If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf or mation about changing the function of the displa y s witch or po wer/standb y b utton, see the âSetting Other P ower Pref erencesâ section in Chapter 3, âP ower . â
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â5 Ligh ts Component Description 1 Caps loc k light On: Caps lock is on. 2 P ower/standb y light â¡ On: Notebook is tur ned on. Blinking: Notebook is in standby . Off: Notebook is off . 3 Mute light On: V olume is muted. (Continued)
1â6 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Component Description 4 Wireless light (av ailable on select models)* On: One or more optional inter nal wireless de vices, such as a WLAN and/or a Bluetooth® de vice (select models only), are tur ned on. â 5 Num lock light On: Num lock or the embedded numeric ke ypad is on. *The wireless lights (on the wireless b utton and on the front of the notebook) displa y the same inf ormation. The wireless light on the wireless button is visib le only when the notebo ok is open; the wire less light on the front of the notebook is visib l e when the notebook is closed. â F or inf or mation about estab l is hing a wireless link, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless . â¡ The pow er/standby light associated with the po wer/standb y b utton and the pow er/standb y light on the front of the notebook displa y the same inf or mation. The po wer/standb y light associated with the pow er/standby button is visib le only when the notebook is open; the power/standb y light on the front of the notebo ok is visible when the notebook is closed.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â7 Wir eles s and V olum e But tons Component Description 1 V olume down b utton Decreases system v olume. 2 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores v olume. 3 V olume up button Increases system v olume. 4 Wireless b utton (av ailable on select models) T urns the wireless functionality on or off b ut does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. F or inf or mation about estab lishing a wireless link, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless.
1â8 Har d war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Antennae Component Description Antennae (2)* Send and receiv e wireless de vice signals. Ã Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output pow er of this de vice is below the FCC radio frequency e xposure limits. Ne v er theless, the de vice should be used in such a manner that the potential f or human contact during nor mal oper ation is minimized. T o a void the possibility of e xceeding the FCC radio frequency e xposure limits, human pro ximity to the antennae should be not less than 20 cm (8 inches) during nor mal operation, including when the notebook displa y is closed. *The antennae are av ailable on se lect models . The antennae are not visib le from the outside of the not ebook. F or optimal transmission, k eep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â9 Fr ont C omponen ts Ligh ts Component Description 1 Wireless light* (a vailab le on select models) On: One or more optional inter nal wireless de vices, such as a WLAN and/or a Bluetooth de vice (select models only), are tur ned on. â 2 P ower/standb y light â¡ On: Notebook is tur ned on. Blinking: Notebook is in standby . Off: Notebook is off . (Continued)
1â10 Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Har dw ar e Component Description 3 IDE (Integrated Driv e Electronics) drive light On or blinking: The internal hard drive or an optical drive is being accessed. 4 Batter y light On: The batter y pac k is charging. Blinking: The batter y pac k has reached a low-battery condition. Off: The batter y pac k is fully charged or not inser ted. *The wireless lights displa y the same inf or mation. The wireless light on the front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed; the wireless light on the wireless button is visib l e only when the notebook is open. â F or inf ormation about establ ishing a wireless link, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless. â¡ The pow er/standby light associated with the po wer/standb y button and the pow er/standby light on the front of the notebook displa y the same inf or mation. The po wer/standb y light associated with the pow er/standby button is visib le when the notebook is open; the power/standb y light on the front of the notebook is visible only when the notebook is closed.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â11 Speak ers , Jac ks and Dis play R elea se Bu tton Component Description 1 Stereo speake rs (2) Produce stereo sound. 2 Displa y release button Opens the notebook. 3 A udio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional monaural (single sound channel) microphone. 4 A udio-out (headphone) jack Connects optional headphones or pow ered stereo speakers . Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR.
1â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Rea r C om po ne nt s Component Description Exhaust v ent* Provides airflo w to cool intern al components. Ã T o pre vent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to b lock airflow . *The notebook has 4 v ents. This and all other v ents are visible on the bottom of the notebook. One v ent is also visible on the left side of the notebook.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â13 Left -Si de Com ponents P or ts and J ac ks Component Description 1 P ower connector Connects the A C adapter cab le. 2 Monitor por t Connects an optional V GA monitor or projector . 3 Expansion por t (av ailable on select models)* Connects the notebook to an optional Expansion Base. 4 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional network cable . 5 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects the modem cable . 6 USB por t â Connects an optional USB de vice. *F or e xpansion por t signal information, see the âExpansion P or t Input/Output Signalsâ section in âAppendix A. â â Depending on the model, the notebook has 2 or 3 USB por ts . The other USB por ts are on the righ t side of the notebook.
1â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e P C C ard Slot and But ton Component Description 1 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 2 PC Card eject button Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â15 Righ t- Side C ompon ents Component Description 1 USB por ts (1 or 2 depending on the notebook model)* Connect optional USB de vices. 2 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot (a vailab le on select models) Suppor ts an optional digital memor y card. â 3 1394 por t (select models only) Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , a digital camera, or a digital camcorder . 4 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light (av ailable on select models) On: An optional digital memor y card is being accessed. 5 Optical drive â¡ Suppor ts an optical disc. (Continued)
1â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Component Description 6 S-Videoâout jac k (av ailable on select models) Connects an optional S-Video de vice such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 7 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. Ã Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents ma y not pre v ent a product from being mishandled or stolen. *Depending on the model, the notebook has 2 or 3 USB por ts. The other USB por t is on the left side. â The digital memor y card could be a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card, Memor y Stic k, Memor y Stic k Pro , xD -Picture Card, MultiMediaCard, or Smar tMedia (SM) card. â¡ The type of optical driveâf or example , a D VD-ROM drive , a D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive , or a D VD R/RW an d CD-R W Combo Dr iv eâvaries by notebook model.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â17 Bot tom C omponen ts Mini PCI and Memor y C ompartm ents Component Description 1 Mini PCI compar tment Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice. Ã T o pre vent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI de vice authorized f or use in yo ur notebook by the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in y our countr y . If you install an unauthorized de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the de vice to restore notebook functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 2 Memor y compar tment Contains 2 memor y slots that suppor t replaceable memory modules. The number of preinstalled memor y modules v ar ies b y notebook model.
1â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Ba y s , Bat t ery La tch an d V e nts Component Description 1 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pac k. 2 Batter y pac k release latch Releases a batter y pac k from the batter y ba y .* 3 Exhaust vents (4) â Provide airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre vent o verheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thic k rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . 4 Hard dr iv e bay Holds the inter nal hard drive . * B a tt ery pa c ks v a ry b y m o d e l. â The notebook has 4 v ents. One v ent is also visible on the rear of the notebook.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â19 Additional C omponents Har d w ar e The components included with your notebook v ary by region, country , notebook model, and the optional hardware you purchased. The follo wing sections identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Component Description 1 Batter y pac k* P owers the notebook when the notebook is not connected to e xter nal po wer . 2 A C adapter Conv er ts AC pow er to DC power . 3 P ower cord* Connects an A C adapter to an A C outlet. 4 Modem cable* Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a countr y-specific modem adapter . 5 Countr y-specific modem adapter (included b y region as required)* Adapts the modem cab le to a nonâRJ-11 (modem) jack. *Batter y pac ks v ar y b y model. P o w er cords, modem cab les, and modem adapters v ar y in appearan ce b y region and countr y .
1â20 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Har dw ar e Opt ica l D i scs Software on optical discs, such as CDs or D VDs, is included with all notebook models. â The software applications packaged in the Required for Setup bag are not preinstalled on your notebook. Depending on ho w you want to use your notebook, you might want to install some or all of these applications. â The software applications packaged in the Sa ve for Later bag are preinstalled or preloaded on your notebook. The software discs are provided in case you e ver need to repair or reinstall this software. â Additional discs packaged with your notebook provide operating system recov ery software and dri ver reco v ery software. Application reco very softw are is prov ided with select notebook models. â The Notebook Documentation CD contains Adobe® Acrobat® PDF f iles, not software. The f iles on the Notebook Documentation CD are not preinstalled or preloaded on your notebook.
H ardwa re Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 1â21 Labels The labels af f ixed to the notebook pro vide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or tra vel internationally with the notebook. â Service T agâProvides the product name, product number (P/N), and serial number (S/N) of your notebook. Y ou might need the product number and the serial number when you contact Customer Care. The Service T ag label is aff ixed to the bottom of the notebook. T o display the information on the Service T ag on your screen, select Start > Help and Support. â Microsoft Certif icate of AuthenticityâContains the Microsoft® W indows® Product K ey . Y ou might need the Product K e y to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certif icate is af fix ed to the bottom of the notebook. â Regulatory labelâPro vides regulatory information about the notebook. The Regulatory label is af fix ed to the inside of the battery bay . â Modem Approv al labelâProvides re gulatory information about the modem and lists the agency appro v al markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approv ed for use. Y ou might need this information when tra veling internationally . The Modem Approv al label is af f ixed to the inside of the memory compartment co v er . â W ireless certification labelsâSome notebook models include an optional WLAN de vice and/or an optional Bluetooth® de vice. If your notebook model includes one or more wireless de vices, a certif icate providing re gulatory information about each de vice and the approv al markings of some of the countries in which the de vice has been approv ed for use is included with your notebook. Y ou might need this information when tra veling internationally . W ireless certif ication labels are af f ixed to the inside of the Mini PCI compartment cov er .
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â1 2 T ouc hP a d and K e yboard To u c h P a d Id entifying T ouchP a d Com ponents The T ouchPad includes the follo wing components: 1 T ouchP ad 3 Right T ouchP ad b utton 2 Left T ouchP ad button 4 T ouchP ad ve r tical scrolling region
2â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Using t he T ouc hP ad The T ouchPad pro vides the navigation, selection, and scroll functions of an optional external mouse: â T o mov e the pointer , slide your finger across the T ouchPad surface in the direction you wa nt to mov e the pointer . â T o ex ecute the click functions of the left or right button on an external mouse, press the left or right T ouchPad b utton. â T o scroll, place your finger onto a scrolling re gion, and then slide your f inger along the scrolling region in the direction you want to scroll. (Sliding your f inger from the T ouchPad to a scrolling region without f irst lifting your finger from the T ouchPad and then placing it on the scrolling re gion will not acti v ate the scrolling region.) The T ouchPad is enabled when the notebook is turned on. If you work with k eystrok es rather than mouse actions, you might prefer to disable the T ouchPad to pre v ent accidental T ouchP ad acti vity .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â3 Set ting T o uchP a d Pr efer ences In the W indo ws Mouse Properties windo w you can â Adjust basic pointing de vice settings such as click speed, pointer speed and shape, and mouse trails. â Conf igure the right and left T ouchPad b uttons for right-handed or left-handed use. These b uttons are set by default for right-handed use. T o access the Mouse Properties window , select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hard war e > Mouse. â All W indow s instructions in your notebook documentation describe Microsoft W indows XP procedures based on the def ault W indows XP cate gory view . For information about switching between W indows XP classic vie w and W indo ws XP category vie w , select Start > Help and Support > Customizing y our computer > Files, f olders, and pr ograms > Use Windo ws classic f olders. In the T ouchPad Pr operties windo w you can access additional T ouchPad preferences. » T o access the T ouchPad Properties windo w , use the T ouchPad to select Start > Contr ol Panel > Printers and Other Hardwar e > Mouse > Device Settings , and then select the Settings button. (If you follo w this path using an optional external mouse, the T ouchPad Pr operties windo w might be una v ailable.)
2â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Among the preferences a v ailable in the T ouchPad Pr operties windo w are â T ouchPad T apping, which enables you to tap the T ouchPad once to select an item or twice to double-click an item. T o access T ouchPad T apping settings, select Ta p p i n g . â Edge Motion, which sets the T ouchPad to continue cursor mov ement when your finger reaches the edge of the T ouchPad. T o access Edge Motion settings, select Pointer Motion. â Long Distance Scrolling, which sets the scrolling region to continue scrolling when your f inger reaches the end of the scrolling region. T o access Long Distance Scrolling, select V irtual Scrolling . â PalmCheck, which helps k eep the T ouchPad from being accidentally acti v ated while you are using the ke yboard. T o access PalmCheck, select Sensitivity .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â5 Hot k e y s Id entifying Hotk e ys Hotke ys are preset combinations of the esc key 1 , the fn key 2 , and one of the function ke ys 3 . The icons on the f1 through f12 ke ys represent hotke y functions. Hotke y functions and procedures are described in the follo wing sections.
2â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Hot k e y Quick R ef ere nce The follo wing table identif ies the default hotke y functions. The function of the fn f5 hotke y can be changed. For instructions, see the âSetting Other Po wer Preferencesâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â Default Function Hotkey Opens Help and Suppor t Center . fn f1 Opens print options window . fn f2 Opens def ault Inter net bro wser . fn f3 Switches the image among displa ys. fn f4 Initiates standb y . fn f5 Initiates QuickLoc k. fn f6 Decreases screen brightness. fn f7 Increases screen brightness. fn f8 Pla ys, pauses , or resumes an audio CD or D VD . fn f9 Stops an audio CD or D VD . fn f10 Pla ys the pre vious trac k or chapter on an audio CD or DV D. fn f11 Pla ys the ne xt trac k or chap ter on an audio CD or D VD . fn f12 Displa ys system inf ormation.* fn esc *T o clear the system information display , press esc .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â7 Using Hotk e y Procedure s Using H otk e y s On t he Intern al K e yboard T o use a hotkey command on the notebook k e yboard, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Briefly press fn, and then briefly press the second ke y of the hotke y command. â Press and hold do wn fn, briefly press the second ke y of the hotke y command, and then release both ke ys at the same time. Using H otk e y s on an External K e yboard T o use a hotkey command on an e xternal ke yboard, press the scroll lock ke y twice, then the second ke y only of the hotke y combination. For e xample, to use the fn f5 command on an external k e yboard, press scroll lock scroll lock f5. Using Hotk e y Comman ds Open H elp and Sup port Cen ter (fn f1 ) The fn f1 hotke y opens the Help and Support Center . In addition to providing information about your operating system, the Help and Support Center provides â Information about your notebook, such as model and serial number , installed software, hardware components, and specif ications. â Answers to questions about using your notebook. â T utorials to help you learn to use notebook and operating system features. â Updates for your operating system, dri vers, and the softw are provided on your notebook.
2â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d â Checkups for notebook functionality . â Automated and interacti v e troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recov ery procedures. â Links to Customer Care. Y ou can also access the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. Open Prin t W indo w (fn f2) In W indows the fn f2 hotk ey opens the print options windo w of the acti ve W indows application. Open In ternet Expl or er (fn f3 ) The fn f3 hotke y opens Internet Explorer . â Until you ha ve set up your Internet or netw ork services, the fn f3 hotke y opens the W indo ws Internet Connection wizard. For information about using this wizard and other Internet connection methods, refer to the printed Getting Started guide included with your notebook. â After you ha ve set up your Internet or netw ork services and your W eb browser home page, you can use the fn f3 hotke y to quickly access your home page and the Internet.
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â9 S witc h Imag e (fn f4) The fn f4 hotke y switches the image among display de vices connected to the system. For e xample, if an optional monitor is connected to the notebook through the monitor port, each time you press the fn f4 hotke y the image will switch among the notebook display , the monitor display , and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the monitor . Most monitors recei v e video information from the notebook using the external V GA video standard. The fn f4 hotke y can also toggle images among other de vices recei ving video information from the notebook. The follo wing video transmission types, with examples of de vices that use them, are supported by the fn f4 hotke y: â LCD (notebook display) â External VGA (most monitors) â S-V ideo (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with S-V ideoâin jacks) â Composite video (tele visions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with composite video-in jacks) â Composite video de vices can be connected to the system only by using an HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable.
2â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Initia te Standb y (fn f5 ) The fn f5 hotke y is set by def ault to initiate standby . When standby is initiated, your w ork is sa ved in random access memory (RAM), the screen clears, and po wer is conserve d. While the notebook is in standby , the power/standb y lights blink. â T o initiate standby , the notebook must be on. If the notebook is in hibernation, you must restore from hibernation before you can initiate standby . â T o resume from standby or restore from hibernation, briefly press the po we/standby b utton. For more information about using standb y and hibernation, see Chapter 3, âPo wer . â The function of the fn f5 hotke y can be changed in the operating system. For e xample, you can set the fn f5 hotke y to initiate hibernation instead of standby . In all W indo ws operating system windo ws, references to the sleep b utton apply to the fn f5 hotke y . For information about changing the function of the fn f5 hotke y , see the âSetting Other Po wer Preferencesâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â For more information about using standb y and hibernation, see Chapter 3, âPo wer . â
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â11 Initia te Quic kLoc k (fn f6) The fn f6 hotke y initiates the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your work b y displaying the operating system Log On windo w . While the Log On windo w is displayed, the notebook cannot be accessed un til a W indows user passw ord or a W indo ws administrator password is entered. Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a W indo ws user password or a W indo ws administrator password. F or instructions, refer to the Help and Support Center . T o access the Help and Support Center , press the fn f1 hotke y or select Start > Help and Support. » T o use QuickLock, press fn f6 to display the Log On windo w and lock the notebook. Then follo w the instructions on the screen to enter your W indo ws user password or your W indows administrator passw o rd and access the notebook. For information about combining W indows passw ords with HP passwords, refert to Chapter 6, âSecurity . â Dec rease Brightn ess (fn f7) The fn f7 hotke y decreases the brightness of the notebook screen. The longer you hold do wn the fn f7 hotke y , the more the screen dims. Decreasing screen brightness conserves po wer . » T o increase screen brightness, press the fn f8 hotke y . Inc rease Bri ghtness (fn f8 ) The fn f8 hotke y increases the brightness of the notebook screen. The longer you hold do wn the fn f8 hotke y , the more the screen brightens. » T o decrease screen brightness, press the fn f7 hotke y .
2â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Medi a Activ it y Hotk e y s (fn f9 t hr ough fn f1 2) The follo wing 4 media acti vity hotke ys can control the play of an audio CD or a D VD. T o control the play of a video CD, use the media acti vity controls in your video CD player . P lay , P a use, or R esume an Audio CD or a D VD (fn f9) â If the audio CD or the D VD is not playing, press the fn f9 hotke y to be gin or resume the play . â If the audio CD or the D VD is playing, press the fn f9 h ot key to pause the play . Stop an Audio CD or a D V D (fn f1 0 ) The fn f10 hotke y stops the play of an audio CD or a D VD. Y ou must stop a CD or D VD that is playing before you can remov e it from the optical dri v e. F or more information about inserting or removing a CD or D VD, see the âInserting or Removing a Discâ section in Chapter 4, âMultimedia. â P lay Pr e vious T rac k or Ch apter of an Audio CD or a D VD (fn f1 1 ) The fn f11 hotke y plays the pre vious track of an audio CD or the pre vious chapter of a D VD that is playing. Pl a y N ext Tr a c k o r C h a p t e r o f a n A u d i o C D o r a D VD (fn f1 2) The fn f12 hotk ey plays the ne xt track of an audio CD or the ne xt chapter of a D VD that is playing.
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â13 Disp lay S y s tem Inf orma tion (fn e sc) The fn esc hotke y displays information about system hardware components and software v ersion numbers. T o clear the display , press esc. In the fn esc display , the version of the system BIOS (basic input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some notebook models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. The BIOS date is sometimes called the system R OM version number . For information about updating the system R OM, see the âSoftware Updatesâ section in Chapter 8, âSoftw are Updates and Recov eries and System Softw are. â
2â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d Key p a d s Y ou can do ke ypad work with your notebook b y using the embedded numeric ke ypad in the notebook ke yboard or b y connecting an optional external numeric k eypad. The embedded numeric ke ypad cannot be used while an external ke ypad is connected to the notebook. Using t he Embedd ed Numeri c K e ypad The embedded numeric ke ypad consis ts of 15 keys that can be used like the k eys on an e xternal numeric ke ypad. When the embedded numeric ke ypad is turned on, each ke ypad ke y performs the functions indicated by the icon in the upper -right corner of the ke y .
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â15 T urning t he Embedde d Numeric K e ypad On an d Off When the embedded numeric ke ypad is of f, press fn num lk 1 to turn the ke ypad on. The num lock light 2 is turned on. When the embedded numeric ke ypad is on, press fn num lk to turn the ke ypad of f. The num lock light is turned of f.
2â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide T ouchP ad and K ey boar d S witc hing t he Fu nc tions of K e ypad K e ys Y ou can temporarily switch the functions of an embedded numeric ke ypad ke y between its standard function and its ke ypad function. â T o use a key on the k e ypad as a ke ypad ke y while the ke ypad is turned of f, press and hold fn while pressing the ke y . â T o use a key on the k eypad as a standard k ey while the ke ypad is turned on: â Press and hold fn to type with the ke y in lo wercase. â Press and hold fn shift to type with the ke y in uppercase. Releasing fn returns a keypad k ey to its set function. F or e xample, a ke ypad ke y returns to its ke ypad function if the ke ypad is turned on or to its standard function if the ke ypad is turned of f.
T ouchP ad and K ey b oar d Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 2â17 Using an External N umeric K e ypad â The embedded numeric ke ypad cannot be turned on while an optional external numeric k eypad is connected to the notebook. Most ke ys on most external numeric k e ypads function dif ferently when num lock mode is on than when num lock mode is of f. For exa mp le : â When num lock mode is on, most ke ypad ke ys type numbers. â When num lock mode is of f, most ke ypad ke ys function like the arro w , page up, or page down k eys. T urning Num Loc k Mode On an d Off As Yo u Wo r k T o turn num lock mode on or off on an e xternal numeric keypad as you work, press the num lk ke y on the external k eypad, not on the notebook. â When an external numeric k e ypad is turned on and is in num lock mode, the num lock light on the notebook is on. â When an external numeric k eypad is turned of f or is turned on with num lock mode turned of f, the num lock light on the notebook is of f.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â1 3 Po w e r Po we r S o u r c e s Selec ting a P o w er Source Use the follo wing table to select a recommended po wer source for the way you plan to use the notebook.
3â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Ta s k Recommended P ower Source W ork in most software applications â Charged batter y pac k in the notebook â Exter nal po wer supplied through one of the f ollowing de vices: â A C adapter â Optional Expansion Base â Optional A uto/Air/A C Adapter â Optional A utomobile P ow er Adapter/Charger Charge or calibrate a batter y pac k in the notebook Exter nal po wer supplie d through one of the f ollowing de vices: â A C adapter â Optional Expansion Base â Optional A utomobile P ow er Adapter/Charger â Optional A uto/Air/A C Adapter à T o prev ent damage to the notebook and aircraft systems, do NO T charge the batter y pac k while y ou are using an A uto/Air/A C Adapter on an aircraft. Install or modify system software or write to an optical disc Exter nal po wer supplie d through one of the f ollowing de vices: â A C adapter â Optional Expansion Base
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â3 S witc hing B etw een Ba t ter y and External Po we r The notebook runs on external po wer whene ver e xternal po wer is a v ailable to the notebook. This conserves the char ge in an inserted battery pack. External po wer can be supplied through the A C adapter or through an optional Expansion Base, Auto/Air/A C Adapter , or Automobile Po wer Adapter/Charger . Because the notebook switches between battery po wer and external po wer according to the av ailability of external po wer: â If the notebook is running on battery po wer and you connect the notebook to external po wer , the notebook switches to external po wer . â If the notebook is running on external po wer (and contains a charged battery pack) and you disconnect the notebook from external po wer , the notebook switches to battery power . A Po wer Meter icon is displayed by def ault in the notif ication area, at the far right of the taskbar . The Po wer Meter icon changes shape whene ver the po wer source changes between battery po wer and external po wer . If the Po wer Meter icon is not displayed in the notif ication area: 1. Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options. 2. Select the Advanced tab . 3. Select the Always show icon on the taskbar check box. 4. Select OK.
3â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r P o w er Control and Li ght Locations The follo wing illustration is provided as a quick reference to the locations of the po wer controls and lights on the notebook. The function of each of these items is summarized in Chapter 1, âHardware. â Instructions for using these items are provided in this chapter . â The po wer/standb y light associated with the po wer/standby b utton and the po wer/standby light on the front of the notebook display the same information. The po wer/standby light associated with the po wer/standby b utton is visible only when the notebook is open; the po wer/standb y light on the front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed. 1 Display switch 4 fn f5 hotke y 2 Po wer/standby b utton 5 Po wer/standby light 3 Po wer/standby light 6 Battery light
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â5 Standb y , H iberna tion and Shutdo wn Ov er vie w s Standb y Standby reduces po wer to system components that are not in use. When standby is initiated, your w ork is sa ved in random access memory (RAM), the screen is cleared, and the po wer/standby lights blink. Sa ving your work before initiating standb y is not usually necessary b ut is a recommended precaution. When you resume from standby , your work is returned instantly to the screen. By default, the system initiates standby after 10 minutes of notebook inacti vity when the notebook is running on battery po wer and after 25 minutes of inacti vity when the notebook is running on external po wer . Fo r information about changing these settings, see the âUsing Po wer Schemesâ section later in this chapter .
3â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Hib er nat i on à CA UTION: If the confi gur ation o f the notebook s yst em is changed dur ing hibernati on , it migh t not be possible to r esume fr om hibernatio n. W hen the notebook is in hiber nation: â Do not add or r emov e a memor y module . â Do not r emov e or r eplace the hard dr i v e . â Do not connec t or disconnect an e xternal de v ice . â Do not inse rt or remo ve a CD , DVD , P C Car d, or digital memory car d . Hibernation sa ves your w ork to a hibernation f ile on the hard dri ve and then shuts do wn the notebook. When hibernation is complete, the po wer/standby lights are turned of f. When you restore from hibernation, your work is returned to the screen where you left of f. Restoring from hibernation takes a little longer than resuming from standby b ut is much faster than returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook. T o determine whether the notebook is in hibernation or turned of f, press the po wer/standby b utton. â If the notebook is in hibernation, your work is returned to the screen. â If the notebook is of f, W indo ws loads. When the notebook is running on battery po wer , hibernation is initiated by def ault after 30 minutes of notebook inacti vity or whene ver the notebook reaches a critical lo w-battery condition. Hibernation is enabled by def ault b ut can be disabled. T o prev ent loss of work during a critical lo w-battery condition, disable hibernation only during a battery pack calibration. » T o verify that hibernation is enabled, select Start > Contr ol Pane l > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hibernate tab . If hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â7 Lea ving Y our W ork If you plan to r esume shortly âInitiate standby for shorter times and hibernation for longer times or for po wer conserv ation. The amount of time a battery pack can support standby or hibernation or hold a charge v aries by notebook conf iguration and the condition of the battery pack. Standby requires more po wer than hibernation. If you plan to r esume within 2 weeks âShut down the notebook. If possible, connect the notebook to external po wer to keep an inserted battery pack fully char ged. If the notebook will be unused and disconnected fr om ex ternal power for mor e than 2 weeks âShut down the notebook. T o extend the life of an inserted battery pack, remo ve the battery pack and store it in a cool, dry location. If an e xternal power supply is uncertain âInitiate hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. A po wer supply might become uncertain because of such conditions as an electrical storm or a nearly dischar ged battery pack. Inter f erence with Driv e M edia T o prev ent the loss of playback or playback quality , do not initiate standby or hibernation while playing a dri ve medium. If standby or hibernation is initiated while a dri ve medium such as a CD or D VD is in use, you might see the warning message âPutting the computer into hibernation or standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue?â If the message is displayed, select No. After you select No: â Playback might resume. - or - â Playback might stop and the screen might be cleared. T o return to your work, press the po wer/standby b utton and then restart the disc.
3â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Standb y , H iberna tion and Shutdo wn Procedur es This section explains the def ault standby , hibernation, and shutdo wn procedures. For information about changing the function of some of the po wer f eatures on your notebook, see the âPo wer Preferencesâ section later in this chapter . The controls and lights discussed in this section are illustrated in in the âPo wer Control and Light Locationsâ section earlier in this chapter . T urnin g th e Notebook On or Off Ta s k Procedure Results T ur n on the notebook. Press the pow er/standby b utton. â Pressing the power/standby button turns on the notebook from standby, hibernation, or shutdown. â P ower/standb y lights are tur ned on. â Operating system is loaded. Shut down the notebook. â In Windows XP Home, select Start > T urn Off Computer > T urn Off. * â â In Windows XP Prof essional, select Start > T u rn Off Computer > Shut down > OK. * â â P ower/standb y lights are tur ned off . â Operating system is shut down. â Notebook is tur ned off . *If the system is unresponsiv e and you ar e unab le to shut down the notebook with this procedure, see the âUsing Emergency Shutdo wn Proceduresâ section later in this chapter . â Depending on your netw ork connections, the T ur n Off Computer bu tton might be called the Shut Down but to n.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â9 Initia ting or Resuming from Standb y Ta s k Pr ocedure Result Initiate standb y . With the notebook on, use any of the f ollowing procedures: â Press the fn f5 hotke y . â Close the notebook. â When the notebook is closed, the display presses the display switch, which then initiates standby. â In Windows XP Home, select Start > T urn Off Computer > Stand By . * â In Windows XP Pr ofessional, select Start > T urn Off Computer > Stand by > OK . * (If standby is not displa yed, press the down arro w , and then select Stand by from the drop-down list.) â P ower/standb y lights b link. â Screen is cleared. Allow the system to initiate standby . No action is required. The system initiates standb y â After 10 minutes of inactivity while running on batter y pow er . â After 25 minutes of inactivity while running on external pow er . â P ower/standb y lights b link. â Screen is cleared. Resume from standby . â Briefly press the power/standb y bu tt on . - or - â Open the notebook. â â P ower/standb y lights are tur ned on. â Yo u r w o r k i s retur ned to the screen. *Depending on your netw ork connections, the T ur n Off Computer b utton might be called the Shut Down but to n. â Depending on yo ur notebook configuration, y ou might also be able to resume from standby b y moving or activ ating a control on an opti onal mouse or b y opening the displa y if the notebo ok was closed while in standb y .
3â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Initia ting or Restoring from Hibern ation Hibernation cannot be initiated unless it is enabled. Hibernation is enabled by def ault. T o verify that hibernation remains enabled, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Hiber nate tab . If hibernation is enabled, the Enable hiber nation check box is selected. Ta s k Procedure Result Initiate hiber nation. In Windows XP Home, select Star t >T urn Off Computer . * Then hold down shift as y ou select the Stand By but to n. In Windows XP Pr ofessional, select Start > T urn Off Computer > Hibernate. * (If hiber nate is not display ed, press the down arro w , and then select Hibernate from the drop-down list.) â P owe r/standby lights are tur ned off . â Screen is cleared. Allow the system to initiate hiber nation. No action is required. If the notebook is running on batter y pow er and hiber nation is enabled, the system initiates hiber nation â After 30 minutes of notebook inactivity . â Whene v er the batter y pac k reaches a critical low-batter y condition. â P owe r/standby lights are tur ned off . â Screen is cleared. Restore from hiber nation. Press the pow er/standby b utton. â â P owe r/standby lights are tur ned on. â Y our wo r k is retur ned to the screen. *Depending on your netw ork connections, the T ur n Off Computer b utton might be called the Shut Down but to n. â If the system initiated hibernation becaus e of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a char ged battery pack before you press the power/standby button. (The system migh t not respond if the drained battery pack is the only power source.)
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â11 Using Em ergency Shu tdo wn Procedur es If the notebook does not respond to the standard W indo ws shutdo wn procedure for your operating system, try the follo wing emer gency shutdo wn procedures in the sequence provided: â Press ctrl alt del. Then â In W indo ws XP Home, select Shut Down > T urn Off . â In W indo ws XP Professional, select Shut down from the drop-do wn list, and then select OK. â Press and hold do wn the po wer/standb y button for at least 4 seconds. â Unplug the notebook from external po wer and remov e the battery pack. For battery pack remo val instructions see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section later in this chapter .
3â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r P o w er Pref erences Using P o w er Sc hemes A po wer scheme controls the amount of po wer the notebook uses while running on external po wer or on a battery pack, and also sets the notebook to initiate standb y or hibernation after a period of inacti vity you specify . » T o select a preset po wer scheme or create a custom po wer scheme, select Start > Control P anel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Set ting a Standb y P as s w ord T o set the notebook to prompt for a password before resuming from standby , select Start > Control Panel > P erformance and Maintenance > P ower Options. Select the Advanced tab, select the check box for Prompt f or password when computer r esumes from standby , and then select OK. For information about other passwords and security features, see Chapter 6, âSecurity . â Set ting Ot her P o w er Pref erence s Y ou can change the function of the po wer/standby b utton, the fn f5 hotke y , and the display switch. By default, when the notebook is on: â Briefly pressing the po wer/standby b utton initiates hibernation. â Pressing the fn f5 hotke y , called the sleep b utton in all Microsoft operating systems, initiates standby . â Closing the notebook presses the display switch, which initiates standby .
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â13 T o change the function of the power/standb y button, the fn f5 hotke y , or the display switch: 1. Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Advanced tab . â T o change the function of the power/standb y button, select a function from the drop-do wn list for âWhen I press the po wer/standb y button on my computer . â â T o change the function of the fn f5 hotkey , select a function from the drop-do wn list for âWhen I press the sleep b utton on my computer . â â T o change the function of the display switch, select a function from the drop-do wn list for âWhen I close the lid of my portable computer . â (The function of the display switch when you open the display is unaf fected by these settings. When you open the display while the notebook is in standby , the display switch turns on the notebook.) 2. Select OK. The hibernate function is a v ailable in the po wer/standb y button, sleep b utton, and display switch drop-do wn lists only if hibernation is enabled. If the hibernate function is not a v ailable on these lists, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Hiber nate tab . Select the Enable Hibernation check box, and then select OK.
3â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Batte ry P ack Cha r g i ng a B att ery P ack T o prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays: â If you are charging a ne w battery pack: â Char ge the battery pack while the notebook is connected to external po wer through the A C adapter . â When you charge the battery pack, char ge it fully . â If you are charging an in-use battery pack: â Allo w the battery pack to dischar ge to about 10 percent of a full char ge through normal use before char ging it. â When you charge the battery pack, char ge it fully . A battery pack inserted in the notebook charges whene ver the notebook is connected to external po wer through an A C adapter or through an optional Expansion Base, Automobile Po wer Adapter/Charger , or Auto/Air/A C Adapter . Ã CA UTION: T o pr e ven t damage to the notebook and air cr aft sy stems, do NO T char ge the bat te ry pack while y ou ar e using an A uto/A ir/A C Ada pter on a n a irc raf t . A battery pack inserted in the notebook char ges whether the notebook is of f or in use, b ut the battery pack charges f aster while the notebook is of f. Charging might be delayed if a battery pack is ne w , has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â15 The battery light displays char ge status: â On: the battery pack is char ging. â Blinking: the battery pack has reached a lo w-battery condition and is not charging. â Of f: the battery pack is fully char ged or not installed. For information about determining the amount of char ge in a battery pack, see the âMonitoring the Char ge in a Battery Packâ section next in this chapter . Monitoring t he C harg e in a Bat ter y P ac k Obtainin g Accurate C harge R eports T o increase the accuracy of battery char ge reports: â Allo w a battery pack to dischar ge to about 10 percent of a full charge through normal use before char ging it. â When you charge a battery pack, char ge it fully . The char ge in e ven a ne w battery pack might be reported inaccurately until the battery pack has been fully char ged at least once. â If a battery pack has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery pack instead of simply char ging it. For information about battery calibration, see the âCalibrating a Battery Packâ section later in this chapter .
3â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Disp lay ing C harg e Reports T o display battery charge information on the screen, use the operating system Po wer Meter feature. T o access the Power Meter display: â Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > P ower Meter tab . - or - â Select the Pow e r M e te r icon, which is displayed b y default in the notif ication area. T o display the Po wer Meter icon if the default setting has been changed, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erformance and Maintenance > P ower Options. Select the Advanced tab, select the Always show icon on the taskbar check box, and then select OK. Po wer Meter displays battery status in both percent and time: â The percent indicates the amount of char ge remaining in the battery pack. â The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pac k continues to pr ovide power at the curr ent level. F or example, the time remaining will decrease if you start playing a D VD and will increase if you stop playing a D VD.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â17 Manag ing L o w- Bat t ery Cond it io ns This section describes default lo w-battery condition alerts and system responses. The default battery light responses cannot be changed. T o change other responses, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erformance and Maintenance > P ower Options, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Id entifying Lo w-Ba tt ery C onditions When a battery pack that is the only po wer source for the notebook reaches a low-battery condition, a text w arning message is displayed, and the battery light blinks. If a lo w-battery condition is not resolv ed and the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack continues to drop, the notebook e ventually enters a critical low-battery condition. If the notebook is on or in standby when a critical lo w-battery condition is reached: â If hibernation is enabled, the system initiates Hibernation. Some unsa ved w ork might be lost. â If hibernation is disabled, th e notebook remains briefly in standby , and then shuts do wn. All unsa ved w ork is lost. Hibernation is enabled by def ault. T o verify that hibernation remains enabled, select Start > Contr ol Panel > Pe rf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hiber nate tab . If hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected.
3â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Resol ving Lo w-B at ter y Conditions à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt pr oblems w hen r est or ing fr om hibernation: If the notebook has r eac hed a cr itical lo w-batter y conditi on and has begun to initiate hibe rnati on , do not re stor e pow er until hibernati on is comple te . When hibe rnati on is complete , the po w er/standb y lights ar e turned o ff . T o resolve a lo w-battery condition: â If external po wer is av ailabl e, connect the notebook to the external po wer source. â If a char ged battery pack is av ailable , shut do wn the notebook or initiate hibernation. Insert a char ged battery pack, and then turn on the notebook. â If no po wer source is a v ailable, sa v e your work. Then initiate hibernation or shut do wn the notebook.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â19 C alibratin g a Ba t tery P a ck When to Calib r ate Even if a battery pack is hea vily used, calibration should be necessary only once a month. Y ou do not ha ve to calibrate a ne w battery pack before f irst use. Calibration does not usually incr ease battery run time, bu t it can increase the accuracy of battery char ge displays, especially under the follo wing conditions: â When the battery pack has been unused for one month or more. â When the notebook has been running primarily on ext er na l po wer (and rarely on battery po wer) for more than one month. â When battery char ge displays report large changes in the percent of po wer remaining within 2 minutes. For e xample, if the Po wer Meter displays 20 percent of a full char ge remaining and then less than 2 minutes later displays only 5 percent of a full charge remaining, the rapid drop in char ge remaining indicates that the battery pack needs calibration. For more information about battery char ge displays, see the âMonitoring the Char ge in a Battery Packâ section earlier in this chapter .
3â20 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Po w e r Ho w to C alibrate T o calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully dischar ge, and then fully recharge the battery pack. C harging t he Ba tter y P ac k Char ge the battery pack while the notebook is on. T o charge the battery pack: à CA UTION: T o pr e ven t damage to the notebook and air cr aft sy stems, do NO T char ge the bat te ry pack while y ou ar e using an A uto/A ir/A C Ada pter on a n a irc raf t . 1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. 2. Connect the notebook to external po wer through the AC adapter or an optional Automobile Po wer Adapter/Charger or Auto/Air/A C Adapter . (The notebook battery light is on as the battery pack char ges.) 3. Lea ve the notebook connected to e xternal po wer until the battery pack is fully char ged. (The notebook battery light is turned of f.) Disc harging t he Ba tter y P ac k à CA UTION: T o pr e ven t loss o f w ork , save y our w ork be for e beginning an unattended disc har ge pr ocedur e. The notebook must remain on thr oughout the discharge process. The battery pack can dischar ge whether or not you are using the notebook, b ut the battery pack will discharge f aster if the notebook is in use.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â21 If you use the notebook occasionally during the dischar ge process described belo w and ha ve set ener gy-saving timeouts, e xpect the follo wing performance from your system during the dischar ge: â Any unsa ved work from your current session will be lost when the battery pack is fully dischar ged and the notebook is shut do wn. â The system will not turn of f a connected optional monitor . â The system will not decrease hard dri ve speed while the notebook is idle. â System-initiated standby will not occur . T o fully discharge the battery pack: 1. Disable hibernation. T o disable hibernation, select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hibernate tab . Then clear the Enable Hibernation check box . 2. Display the settings on the Po wer Schemes tab . T o access the Po wer Schemes tab, select Start > Control P anel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > P ower Schemes tab . 3. Record all settings in the Pl ugged In column and all settings in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 4. Use the drop-do wn lists to set each item in both columns to Ne ver . 5. Select OK. 6. Disconnect the notebook from the external po wer source, bu t do not turn of f the notebook. 7. Run the notebook on battery po wer until the battery pack is fully dischar ged. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the notebook is shut do wn.
3â2 2 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Po w e r Rech arging the B at ter y P ac k 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and maintain the connection until the battery pack is fully recharged and the battery light is turned of f. Y ou can use the notebook while the battery pack is rechar ging, but the battery pack will char ge faster if the notebook is turned of f. 2. If the notebook is turned of f, turn on the notebook when the battery light is turned of f, indicating that the battery pack is fully char ged. 3. Display the settings on the Po wer Schemes tab . T o access the Po wer Schemes tab, select Start > Control P anel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > P ower Schemes tab . 4. Reenter the settings you recorded earlier for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 5. Select OK. Ã CA UTION: T o pre vent an uninte nded batt ery drain and a potenti al los s of w ork w hen the not ebook re aches a c riti cal lo w-battery condition , r eenable hiber natio n after calibr ating the battery pack. T o r eenable hibernati on: Selec t Start > C ontrol P anel > P erformance an d Maintenan ce > P ow er O ptions > Hiberna te tab . Sele c t the Enable Hiber natio n c heck bo x, and then s elect OK .
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â2 3 Con se rvi ng Batt ery P ac k P o w er T o extend the time that a battery pack can run the notebook from a single char ge, use the follo wing battery conserv ation settings and procedures. Cons erving P o w er a s Y ou W ork T o conserve po wer as you work: â Pre vent de vices you are not using from drawing po wer from the notebook. For e xample: â T urn of f wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and close modem applications. â Disconnect from the notebook any e xternal devices that are not plugged into an external po wer source. â Stop or remov e an inserted PC Card. â Disable or remov e an inserted digital memory card. â T urn of f a de vice connected to the S-V ideoâout jack. â Use optional, externally po wered speakers instead of the internal speakers whene ver possible. When you use the internal speakers, minimize system v olume. V olume can be adjusted with the v olume buttons. â Minimize screen brightness. T o decrease screen brightness, press the fn f7 hotke y . T o increase screen brightness, press the fn f8 hotke y . â If you lea ve your w ork, initiate standb y or hibernation, or shut do wn the notebook.
3â2 4 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Po w e r Selec ting P o w er C onser v a tion Set tings T o set the notebook to use less power: â Select a short wait for the screen sa ver and select a screen sa ver with minimal graphics and motion. T o select a screen sa ver and a screen sa v er wait time, select Start > Contr ol Panel > A ppearance and Themes > Display > Screen Sa ver tab, and then follo w the in structions on the screen. â Select or create a po wer scheme that minimizes po wer use. For more information about using po wer schemes, see the âUsing Po wer Schemesâ section earlier in this chapter .
Po w e r Hard war e and So ftwar e Guide 3â2 5 Rep l ac i ng a B a t te r y P a c k à CA UTION: T o pr e v ent lo ss of w ork w hen r emov ing a bat te ry pack that is the only po we r sour ce, sh ut do w n the noteboo k or initiate hiber nation bef or e remo ving the battery pack . (If y ou initiat e hibernati on , do not begin the fo llo w ing pr ocedur e until th e po w er/st andb y lights ar e turned off , indicating that hiber natio n is complete .) Rem o vi ng a B at t er y P ac k Although battery packs v ary by model, the remo val procedure is the same for all models. T o remove a battery pack: 1. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 2. Slide the battery release latch 1 to release the battery pack. 3. T ilt the battery pack 2 and pull it out of the battery bay 3 .
3â2 6 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Po w e r Inser ting a Ba t tery P a ck Although battery packs v ary by model, the insertion procedure is the same for all models. T o insert a battery pack: 1. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 2. Lo wer the battery pack 1 into the battery bay and rotate it 2 until it is seated.
Po w e r Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 3â2 7 Storing a B at ter y P ac k à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt damage to a battery pack , do not e xpose it t o high tem per atur es f or e xtended per iods o f time . If the notebook will be unused and disconnected from external po wer for more than 2 weeks, remov e and store the battery pack. High temperatures, which might be present in parked cars or some workplaces, accelerate the se lf-dischar ge rate of a stored battery pack. T o prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a location that is cool and dry . Calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. Dis posing of a Used B at ter y P a ck à W ARN ING: T o r educe the risk o f fir e or burns , do not disass emble , cr ush , or punc tur e a battery pack; short the ext ernal con tacts on a battery pack; or dispo se of a battery pack in f ire or w ater . Do not e xpose a batte ry pack to high t emper ature s abo v e 60°C (14 0°F ) . Re place only w ith a bat t ery pack appr ov ed f or this comput er . N When a battery pack has r eached the end o f its use ful lif e , do not dispos e of the battery pack in ge ner al hous ehold w as te . F ollo w the local law s and regulati ons in y our ar ea for comput er battery pack dispos al . In E ur ope , dispose of or r ecy cle the battery packs b y using the public collecti on s yste m or b y r eturning the m to HP , y our auth ori z ed servi ce par tner , or their agents.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â1 4 Multim edia Internal Speak ers The internal speakers, identif ied in the following illustration, play sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, dri v e media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external de vice, such as headphones, is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled.
4â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia V olum e Controls Y ou can adjust v olume with the volume b uttons on the notebook or the v olume control software a v ailable in your operating system and in some multimedia applications. The v olume mute button on the notebook ov errides all software volume settings. â T o access the operating system volume controls, select Start > Control P anel > Sounds, Speech, and A udio Devices > Sounds and A udio Devices, and then select the Vo l u m e tab . â T o access additional sound quality settings, such as balance, select the Advanced b utton in the De vice v olume pane. â T o display a volume icon in the notif ication area, select the check box for Place volume icon in the taskbar , and then select OK. â T o adjust volume using the notebook v olume b uttons: â T o decrease volume, press the v olume do wn button 1 . â T o mute or restore volume, press the v olume mute bu tt on 2. â T o increase volume, press the v olume up b utton 3 . When v olume is muted, the mute light (on the volume mute b utton) is turned on. When v olume is rest ored, the mute light is turned of f.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â3 Exter nal Au dio De vices Using t he Audio - O ut (Hea dphone) J ac k à W ARN ING: T o r educe the risk o f perso nal injury , adjust the v olume bef or e putting on headphones . à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt pos sible damage to an e xter nal de v ice , do not plug a monaur al (single sound c hannel) plug into the a udio -out j ack . The audio-out jack, sometimes called a headphone jack, connects optional headphones or externally-po wered stereo speakers. The audio-out jack, identif ied in the fo llo wing illustration, is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. When you connect a de vice to the audio-out jack, use only a 3.5-mm plug. When a de vice is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled.
4â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Using t he Audio -In (Mi crophon e) Jac k The audio-in jack, identif ied in the follo wing illustration, connects an optional monaural (single sound channel) microphone. The audio-in jack is sometimes called a micr ophone jack. It is recommended that you use an electret condenser microphone with a 3.5-mm plug. If you connect a dynamic microphone, the recommended sensiti vity might not be achie v ed.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â5 Exter nal Vid eo De vices Con necti ng a n S - V ideo De v ice (Sel ect Models O nly) Conn ectin g the Au dio The S-V ideoâout jack, av ailable onl y on select models, supports video signals only . If you are setting up a conf igura tion that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a D VD movie on your notebook and displaying it on your tele vision, you need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable a v ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the audio-out (headphone) jack on the notebook. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio-in jack on the external de vice. For more information about the notebook audio-out jack, see the âUsing the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jackâ section earlier in this chapter .
4â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Conn ectin g the Vid eo T o transmit video signals through the S-V ideoâout jack, you need a standard S-V ideo cable, av ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug either end of the S-V ideo cable into the notebook S-V ideoâout jack, illustrated below . Plug the other end of the cable into the S-V ideoâin jack on the external de vice.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â7 Disp lay ing a Vid eo Imag e T o display an image on the notebook display or a video device display , both the notebook and the video de vice must be turned on. » T o switch the image between the notebook display and the video de vice display , repeatedly press the fn f4 hotke y . Pressing the fn f4 hotke y switches the image among the notebook display , any connected displays, and simultaneous display . For more information about fn f4 and other hotk eys, see the âHotke ysâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchPad and K e yboard. â
4â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia CD and D VD Procedure s In serting o r R emo v ing a Di sc Use the follo wing procedures to insert or remo ve an optical disc such as a CD or a D VD. A disc that is playing must be stopped before it can be remov ed. T o stop a disc, press the fn f10 hotke y . â T o insert a discâBe sure the notebook is turned on. Then press the release b utton 1 on the dri ve bezel to release the media tray . Pull the tray outward 2 , place the disc label-side up on the media tray 3 , and then close the media tray 4 . â T o remove a disc while the notebook is turned onâPress the release b utton on the dri ve bezel to release the media tray . Pull the tray outward, remo v e the disc, and then close the media tray . â T o remove a disc while the notebook is turned of f: a. Insert the end of a small object like a paper clip into the release access 5 in the front bezel of the dri v e. b . Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released. c. Pull the tray outward, remo v e the disc, and then close the media tray .
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â9 Using M edia Ac ti vity H otk e y s Media acti vity hotke ys are preset combinations of the fn ke y 1 and 4 of the function ke ys. Y ou can use these hotke ys to control the play of an audio CD or a D VD that is inserted in the optical dri ve. T o control the play of an inserted video CD, use the media acti vity controls in your video CD player application. â T o play , pause, or resume an inserted audio CD or a D VD, press the fn f9 hotke y 2 . â T o stop an inserted audio CD or a D VD that is playing, press the fn f10 hotke y 3 . â T o play the previous track of an audio CD or the pre vious chapter of a D VD that is playing, press the fn f11 hotke y 4 . â T o play the next track of an audio CD or the next chapter of a D VD that is playing, press the fn f12 hotke y 5 . For more information about these and other hotk e ys, see the âHotke ysâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchPad and K e yboard. â
4â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Set ting AutoPla y Pref erence s AutoPlay is the operating system feature that determines ho w the notebook responds when you access f iles on a remov able storage de vice such as a D VD-R OM dri ve, a D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri v e, or a D VD R W/R and CD-R W Combo Dri ve. AutoPlay default settings v ary by notebook model and conf iguration. For e xample, the f irst time you insert a CD or D VD into an optical dri ve and close the tray , the CD or D VD might begin playing or the AutoPlay pop-up windo w might be displayed. If the AutoPlay pop-up windo w is displayed, select your preferences as instructed on the screen. The default AutoPlay settings can be changed. F or e xample, you can set the notebook to display a slide sho w of the pictures on a CD containing digital photographs, begin playing the f irst track of a CD containing music, or display the names of the folders and f iles on a CD containing data f ile s. Y ou can also set the notebook to prompt you for a preference each time you insert a disc or to do nothing when you insert a disc. At many AutoPlay settings, ther e might be a pause of se veral seconds while AutoPlay opens both the disc and the associated disc player application. AutoPlay preferences are not a v ailable for diskette dri ves, b ut can be applied to most other remov able storage devices. AutoPlay preferences can be set for a digital memory card such as a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card, Memo ry Stick, Memory Stick Pro, xD-Picture Card, MultiMediaCard, or SmartMedia (SM) card. T o access AutoPlay settings: 1. Select Start > My Computer . 2. In the Devices with Remo vable Storage group, right-click an item such as a D VD-R OM driv e. 3. Right-click Pr operties. 4. Select the Au t o P l a y tab .
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â11 Protectin g P l a ybac k T o prev ent the loss of playback or playback quality: â For optimal playback quality , sav e your work and close all open applications before playing a CD or a D VD. â Dock or undock the notebook from an optional Expansion Base befor e or after playing a disc, not while playing a disc. Do not initiate standby or hibernation while playing a disc. If standby or hibernation is initiated while a disc is in use, you might see the warning message âPutting the computer into hibernation or standby might stop the playback. Do you w ant to continue?â If this message is displayed, select No. After you select No: â Playback might resume. - or - â Playback might stop and the screen might be cleared. T o return to your work, press the po wer/standby b utton and then restart the disc.
4â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Protectin g a CD or D VD W rite Proce ss à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt los s of w ork and damage to a disc: â Bef or e w r iting to a disc , connect the notebook to a r eliable e xter nal po w er sour ce. Do no t wr ite to a disc w hile the notebook is running on battery pow er . â Bef or e w riting to a dis c, c lose all open appli cations (inc luding sc r een sa v ers and anti vir us so ftwar e) ex cept the disc s oftwar e you ar e using . â Do not cop y dir ectl y fr om a sour ce disc to a des tinatio n disc or fr om a networ k dri v e to a destinati on disc . Instead , copy fr om a sour ce disc or netw ork dr iv e to y our hard dr iv e , and then cop y fr om y our har d dr iv e to the destinatio n disc . â Do not us e the notebook k ey boar d or mo v e the notebook w hile the notebook is w r iting to a disc . The w rite pr ocess is sensiti ve to v ibr ation . Obs ervin g the C op yright W arning It is a criminal of fense, under applicable copyright la ws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, f ilms, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This notebook should not be used for such purposes.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â13 C han ging D VD Region Set tings à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt selec ting a r egio n setting that is not y our permanent pr efer ence, consi der that the r egion s etting on your D VD-RO M dr i ve , D VD/CD-RW C ombo Dri v e , or D VD R W/R and CD-R W Combo Dr iv e can be changed onl y 5 times . â The r egion se tting yo u select the f if th time beco mes the per manent r egion s etting on the DVD-R OM dr iv e or Combo Dr iv e . â The n umber of allo wable r egion change s r emaining on the dr i ve is displa y ed in all softw ar e that can be used t o change a D VD re gion setti ng . Most D VDs that contain copyrighted f iles also contain region codes. The region codes help protect cop yrights internationally . Y ou can play a D VD containing a region code only if the re gion code on the D VD matches the region setting on your D VD-R OM dri ve or Combo Dri ve. If the re gion code on a D VD does not match the region setting on your D VD-R OM dri v e or Combo Dri v e, the message, âPlayback of content from this region is not permitted, â is displayed when you insert the D VD. T o play the D VD, you must change the re gion setting on your D VD-R OM driv e or Combo Dri v e. D VD region settings can be changed in the operating syst em or in some multimedia applications, as described in the follo wing sections. C hangin g D VD Set tings in t he O perating S y s tem T o change D VD region settings in the operating system: 1. Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > System. Select the Hardwar e tab . On the Hardware tab, select the De vice Manager b utton. 2. Select D VD/CD-R OM driv es, right-click the D VD-R OM dri v e or Combo Dri ve for which you w ant to change the region setting, and then select Pr operties. 3. Select the D VD Region tab, and then follo w the instructions on the screen.
4â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia C hangin g D VD Set ting s in a Multimedia Appl icat io n If you use Sonic RecordNo w! or InterV ideo W inD VD Player software, you might f ind it more con venient to change D V D region settings within those applications than to change D VD region settings in the operating system. T o access instructions for changing D VD region settings within â Sonic RecordNo w!, select Start > All Pr ograms > Sonic RecordNow! Then select the Help b utton, identif ied with a question mark icon, on the RecordNo w! console. â InterV ideo W inD VD Player , select Start > All Programs > InterV ideo WinD VD Player . Then select Help on the menu bar of the W inD VD console. Depending on your region and notebook model, multimedia applications such as Sonic RecordNo w! and InterV ideo W inD VD Player might be included with your notebook. For more information about Sonic RecordNo w! and InterV ideo W inD VD Player , see the âMultimedia Softwareâ section later in this chapter .
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â15 Multim edia Sof twar e Multim edia Soft w are Ov er vie w A v ariety of multimedia applications that you can use to play , create, and manage digital media is included with your notebook. Most can be accessed from a desktop icon or from Start > All Programs. Others might be provided on CD. Most multimedia applications include a Help f ile that you can access from the menu bar or from an icon that might be identif ied with a question mark. Most applications also include tutorials. Y ou can obtain customer support for any multimedia application included with your notebook. â Some CDs and D VDs contain player software which is not included with your notebook, such as PCFriendly . If you insert a disc that contains player softwa re which is not included with your notebook, you are prompted to install the player software. If you prefer to use multimedia applications which are included with your notebook, decline the player installation and close the installation windo w . Before using any multimedia application, it is recommended that you re vie w the âSetting AutoPlay Preferencesâ and âProtecting Playbackâ and âProtecting a CD or D VD Write Processâ sections earlier in this chapter .
4â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Multimedia Selec ting M ultimedia Ap plica tions The multimedia software included with your notebook is determined by your re gion and notebook model. The follo wing list describes the capabilities of some of the multimedia applications that might be included with your notebook. â Microsoft W indo ws Media Player can be used to play CDs and D VDs, copy music to or from CDs, listen to radio stations, and search for and or ganize digital media f iles. â Sonic RecordNo w! can be used to back up data or audio CDs and D VDs, transfer audio files from a CD to a hard dri ve, play movies, and create audio CDs. â InterV ideo W inD VD Player can be used to play D VDs. â W indows Mo vieMaker can be used to create and edit home movies using basic drag-and-drop procedures. â InterV ideo W inD VD Creator can be used to create, edit, and b urn movies to a D VD or video CD or to present a group of still photographs as a slide sho w . W inD VD Creator is provided on CD. F or installation instructions, see the ne xt section, âInstalling W inD VD Creator . â Y our notebook might include additional multimedia applications. Be sure to explore â Y our desktop icons. â The applications listed at Start > All Programs. â The preloaded items that might be a v ailable at Start > All Pr ograms > SW Setup.
Multimedia Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 4â17 Installin g WinD VD Creator If W inD VD Creator is included with your notebook, it is provided on an InterV ideo W inD VD Cr eator CD. W inD VD Creator can be installed only from a D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri ve or a D VD R W/R and CD-R W Combo Dri ve. If your system does not include either of these dri v es, you cannot install W inD VD Creator from an InterV ideo W inD VD Cr eator CD. T o install W inD VD Creator: 1. Connect the notebook to reliable external po wer . 2. Close any open applications. 3. Insert the InterV ideo W inD VD Cr eator CD into the Combo Dri ve. After se veral seconds, an installation wizard is displayed. If the installation wizard does not display , your AutoPlay settings might ha ve been modif i ed. T o proceed with the W inD VD installation, select Start > Run. In the Open text f ield, type: x:\setup.exe (where x is your Combo Dri v e designation), and then select OK. 4. When the installation wizard is displayed, follo w the installation instructions on the screen. For more information about AutoPlay settings, see the âSetting AutoPlay Preferencesâ section earlier in this chapter .
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â1 5 Wir el ess (Selec t Models On l y) If your notebook is equipped with an integrated wireless de vice such as 802.11 or Bluetooth wireless de vices, you ha ve a wireless notebook. â An 802.11 wireless notebook can connect to wireless networks in corporate of fices, your home, and public places. W ireless networks include wireless local area networks (WLANs) or âhotspots. â Hotspots are wireless access points a v ailable in public places, such as airports, restaurants, cof fee shops, hotels, and uni v ersities. â A Bluetooth wireless notebook can connect to other Bluetooth wireless-enabled de vices using a wireless personal area network (P AN). Y our notebook has a b utton that may be used to enable and disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless de vices and an associated light to indicate the state of the wireless de vices. In addition to the wireless b utton and light, your notebook has a software utility , W ireless Assistant, that enables you to control your wireless de vices. W ireless Assistant is a software utility that enables you to turn on and of f th e 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless de vices indi vidually . F or more information on using W ireless Assistant, refer to the âDe vice Po wer Statesâ section in this chapter .
5â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Wir eless Local Area Net w ork (Sel ect Models O nl y) W ith the 802.11 wireless de vice, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories linked b y a wireless router or a wireless access point. â A large scale WLAN, such as a corporate WLAN or public WLAN hotspot, typically use wireless access points, that can handle a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. â A home or small of f ice WLAN typically uses a wireless router , which enables sev eral wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer , and files without additional pieces of hardware or softwa re. W ir eless access point and wir eless r outer are often used interchangeably . Notebooks with 802.11 WLAN de vices may support one or more of 3 IEEE physical layer standards: â 802.11a â 802.11b â 802.11g
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â3 There are 3 popular implementations of WLAN adapters: â 802.11b only â 802.11b/g â 802.11a/b/g 802.11b, the f irst popular WLAN standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g, which came later , also operates at 2.4 GHz but supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps. An 802.11g WLAN de vice is backward compatible with 802.11b de vices, so the y can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps b ut operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. For information on identifying the type of de vice in your notebook, refer to the âIdentifying a WLAN De viceâ section in this chapter .
5â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Set ting Up a WL AN in Y our Home T o set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet in your home, you need the follo wing equipment. The illustration belo w sho ws an example of a completed wireless netw ork installation that is connected to the Internet. This wireless network includes â An optional broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) 1 . â An optional wireless router (purchased separately) 2 . â Y our wireless notebook 3 . As this network gro ws, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. â If you need technical assistance to install your WLAN, contact the router manufacturer or your ISP .
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â5 Using a WL AN Connec tion T o use a WLAN connection: â V erify that all dri vers required b y the 802.11 wireless device are installed and that the 802.11 wireless de vice is correctly conf igured. â If you are using an integrated 802 .11 wireless device, all required drivers are installed and the adapter is preconfigured and ready for use. â If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice, verify that the 802.11 wireless de vice is turned on. When the 802.11 wireless de vice is turned on, the wireless light is turned on. If the wireless light is of f, turn on the 802.11 wireless de vice. Refer to the âDe vice Po wer Statesâ section. â For your home WLAN, v erify that your router is correctly conf igured. For instructions, refer to your router documentation. â Functional range for subseque nt WLAN connections v ary , depending on your notebook WLAN implementation, router manufacturer , and interference from v arying types of walls and other electronic de vices. For more information about using a WLAN connection: â Refer to information from your ISP and the documentation included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment. â Access the information and W eb site links provided at Start > Help and Support. â Refer to the documentation included with your notebook. The T r oubleshooting guide on the Notebook Documentation CD contains a section about wireless LAN de vice problems and resolutions.
5â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Using Wireless Sec urity Features When you set up your o wn WLAN or access an existing WLAN, alw ays ensure that security features are protecting the WLAN. If you do not enable security on your WLAN, an unauthorized wireless user can access your notebook data and use your Internet connection without your kno wledge. The most common security le vels are W i-Fi Protected Access (WP A)-Personal and W ired Equi v alent Pri vac y (WEP). In addition to enabling WP A-Personal or WEP security encryption on the router , you may want to use one or more of the follo wing security measures: â Change the default netw ork name (SSID) and password. â Use a f ire wall. â Set security on your W eb browser . â Enable MA C address filtering on the router . For more information about WLAN security , refer to the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com/go/wireless for details.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â7 In st alli ng Wire les s So ft ware (O p tion a l) Microsoft W indows XP supports WLAN conf iguration with the Zero Client Conf iguration feature. HP provides a separate WLAN conf iguration utility that must be installed if you plan to use Cisco Compatible Extensions. Cisco Compatible Extensions enable wireless de vices to use Cicso-based WLANs. Id entifying a WL AN De vice T o install HP WLAN software for an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice, you need to kno w the name of the inte grated 802.11 wireless de vice on your notebook. T o identify an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice: 1. Display the names of all the 802.11 wireless de vices on your notebook: a. Select Start > My Computer . b . Right-click in the My Computer windo w . c. Select Properties > Hard ware tab > Device Manager > Network Adapters. 2. Identify the 802.11 wireless de vice from the list that is displayed: â The listing for an 802.11 wireless de vice includes the term wir eless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. â If no 802.11 wireless de vice is listed, either your notebook does not hav e an integrated 802.11 wireless de vice, or the dri ver for the 802.11 wireless de vice is not properly installed.
5â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Accessing WL AN Soft w are and Docum entation Y our WLAN software is preloaded on your notebook and is a v ailable in the Software Setup utility . T o install the WLAN software: » Select Start > All Programs > Softwar e Setup, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. (When you are prompted to select the software you w ant to install, select or clear the corresponding check boxes.) The WLAN software is also a vailable as a SoftP aq at the HP W eb site. T o access, download, and install the SoftP aq, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Select Start > Help and Support. - or - â V isit the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com/support: a. Choose your language and region. b . Select the Do wnload Driv ers and Softwar e radio b utton c. Enter your computer model information, and then follo w the instructions provided at the W eb site. â WLAN software is provided in the Network category. To access model information about your computer, refer to the serial number label. The serial number label is on the bottom of the notebook. T o access documentation for your WLAN software: 1. Install the WLAN software as instructed earlier in this chapter . 2. Open the utility . 3. Select Help on the menu bar . T roubleshooting D e vices For more troubleshooting information, visit the HP W eb site ( http://www .hp.com/go/wireless ) or refer to the documentation included with your notebook.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â9 Bluetoot h (Selec t Models O nly) The Bluetooth de vice provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic de vices such as â Network access points. â Computers (desktop, notebook, PD A). â Phones (cellular , cordless, smart phone). â Imaging de vices (printer , camera). â Audio de vices (headset, speakers). The de vices are represented in the Bluetooth for W indo ws software b y graphical icons that resemble their physical features, which makes them easily recognizable and distinguishes them from other classes of de vices. The Bluetooth for W indows softw a re pro vides the follo w ing functions: â Personal Information Management (PIM) item transferâSends and recei v es information files such as b usiness cards, calendar items , notes, and message items to and from another Bluetooth computer or de vice. â PIM synchronizationâSynchronizes PIM data between a computer , PD A, or cell phone using Bluetooth. â File T ransferâSends and receiv es files to and from another Bluetooth computer . â Network access (Personal Area Netw orking Prof ile)âEnables 2 or more Bluetooth de vices to form an ad-hoc (peer -to-peer) network. Pro vides a mechanism that enables a Bluetooth de vice to access a remote network through a network access point. The network access points can be traditional LAN data access points or group ad-hoc networks that represent a set of de vices that are attached only to one another .
5â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) â Dial-up networkingâConnects Bluetooth de vices to the Internet. â Bluetooth serial portâT ransfers data over the Bluetooth link using a virtual COM port. â Hands-FreeâEnables a vehicle-embedded, hands-free unit or a notebook serving as a hands-free unit to establish a wireless connection to a cellular phone a nd to act as the Bluetooth cellular phone audio input and output mechanism. â Basic imagingâProvides a wire less connection between a Bluetooth-enabled camera and other Bluetooth de vices. The camera can be controlled remotely by a notebook, and images can be transferred from a camera to be stored on a computer or to be printed. â Human interface de viceâProvides a wireless connection to other Bluetooth de vices, such as ke yboards, pointing de vices, gaming de vices, and remote monitoring de vices. â FaxâPro vides a Bluetooth connection that enables a notebook to send or recei ve a f ax message using a Bluetooth cellular phone or modem. â HeadsetâProvides a wireless connection between a headset and a notebook or cellular phone . The headset acts as the de viceâ s audio input and output mechanism and increases mobility . For more information about using Bluetooth with your notebook, refer to the W ir eless Documentation CD included with your notebook.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â11 De vice P o w er Sta te s The wireless b utton 1 enables and disables 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth de vices in conjunction with W ireless Assistant. By default, the 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth de vices and wireless light 2 are turned on when you turn on the notebook. â T urning on a wireless de vice does not automatically create a WLAN or connect you to a WLAN. For information on setting up a WLAN refer to the âW ireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only)â section in this chapter .
5â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) The 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth de vices ha ve 2 po wer states: â Enabled â Disabled Y ou can enable and disable the wireless de vices with the wireless b utton. When the wireless de vices are enabled with the wireless b utton, you can use W ireless Assi stant to turn on and off the de vices indi vidually . When the wireless de vices are disabled, you must enable them before you can turn them on or of f with W ireless Assistant. T o view the state of your wireless de vices, place the cursor ov er the W ireless Assistant icon in the notification area, or open W ireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notif ication area. W ireless Assistant displays the status of the devices as on, of f, or disabled. For more information about W ireless Assistant: 1. Open W ireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notif ication area. 2. Select the Help button.
W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 5â13 Tu r n i n g O n t h e D e v i c e s â If you want your wireless de vices to be turned on when you turn on your notebook, you must turn them on before you shut do wn or restart. If And Then â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off â Wireless light is off Y ou want to turn on either or both de vices 1. Right-clic k the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices yo u want to turn on. â If the wireless devices are turned off, pressing the wireless button disables both devices. The button does not turn on the devices. â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are disab led* â Wireless light is off Y ou want to turn on either or both de vices 1. Press the wireless bu tton. (The de vices retur n to their pre vious on or off state.) 2. If the wireless de vices are tur ned off , r ight-clic k the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 3. Select the de vice or de vices yo u want to turn on. â Wireless Assistant shows that one de vice is on and the other de vice is off â Wireless light is on Y ou want to turn on either or both de vices 1. Right-clic k the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices yo u want to turn on. *If the wireless de vices are not both on when y ou disable the de vices, pressing the wireless button again returns the de vice s to their pre vious on or off state. Pressing the b utton does not tur n on both de vices.
5â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide W ir eless (S elect Models Onl y) T urnin g Of f and Disab ling t he De vices If And Then â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are on â Wireless light is on Y ou w ant to disable both de vices Press the wireless button. Y ou w ant to tur n off either or both de vices 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices y ou want to turn off. â Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off â Wireless light is off Y ou w ant to disable both de vices Press the wireless button. â Wireless Assistant shows that one de vice is on and the other de vice is off* â Wireless light is on Y ou w ant to disable both de vices Press the wireless button. Y ou w ant to tur n off both de vices. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the de vice or de vices y ou want to turn off . *If the wireless de vices are not both on when y ou disable the de vices, pressing the wireless button again returns the de vice s to their pre vious on or off state. Pressing the b utton does not tur n on both de vices.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â1 6 Sec urity Securit y F ea tur es â Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not pre vent a product from being mishandled or stolen. The security features provided with the notebook can protect the notebook, personal information, and data from a v ariety of risks. Depending on your en vironment, some security features may be unnecessary . It is recommended that you follo w the procedures in this chapter for using â Anti virus software â W indo ws updates â Fire wall softw are
6â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security In addition to the W indo ws operating system security measures, the follo wing table may help you decide which other security features to use. Most of these security features can be conf igured in the Setup utility . For more information, refer to âSetup Utility , â in Chapter 8. T o Protect Against Use This Security Feature Unauthorized use of the notebook â Quic k Lock â P ower-on pass word* Unauthorized access to the Setup utility ( f10 ) HP administrator pass word* Unauthorized star tup from a CD or a diskette De vice Security* Unauthorized access to data â HP administrator pass word â Fi rewal l so ft ware â Windows updates Unauthorized access to the BIOS settings and other system identification inf or mation HP administrator pass word* Unauthorized remov al of the notebook Security cab le sl ot (used with an optional security cable) F or more inf or mation on the security cable slot, ref er to the âOptional Security Cableâ section in this chapter . *This security feature is configured in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is a non-Windows utility accessed b y pressing f10 when the notebook is star ted or restar ted. The procedures f or using the Setup utility to set specific security pref erences are provided in this chapt er . For inf or mation about displa ying system inf or mation and using othe r Setup utilities, ref er to âSetup Utilityâ in Chapter 8.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â3 Sec urit y Pr ef erences in t he Setup Utilit y Most security preferences are se t in Setup utility . Because the Setup utility is a non-W indows utility , it does not support the pointing de vices on your notebook. When using the Setup utility , you must use the ke ys on your notebook to na vigate and make selections. For more details, refer to âSetup Utilityâ in Chapter 8. Q uic kLock The fn f6 hotke y initiates the operating system QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your notebook by displaying the operating system log-on screen. While the log-on screen is displayed, the notebook cannot be accessed unt il a W indows user passw ord or W indo ws administrator password is entered. Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a W indows user passw ord or W indo ws administrator password. F or instructions, refer to the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. â T o initiate QuickLock, press fn f6. â T o exit QuickLock, enter your W indo ws user password or W indo ws administrator password.
6â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security Pa s s w o r d s Most security features use passwords. Whene ver you set a password, write do wn the password and store it in a secure location aw ay from the notebook. â If you forget your po wer-on passw ord and your HP administrator passw ord, you cannot start up the notebook or restore from hibernation. Call Customer Care or your authorized service partner for additional information. â If you forget your HP administrator passw ord, you will not be able to access the Setup utility .
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â5 HP and Windo w s P as s w ords HP security features and W indo ws operating system security features work independently from one another . For e xample, a de vice disabled in the Setup utility cannot be enabled in W indows. Some password options are pro vided b y your HP software, and others are provided b y your operating system. HP passwords and W indo ws passwords are also independent of one another . The follo wing table lists the dif ferent passwords used b y HP and W indows and describes their functions. F or additional information about W indows passw ords, such as screen-sa ver passwords, refer to Start > Help and Support. HP P assw ords Function HP administrator pass word Protects access to the Setup utility . P ower-on pass word Used to access the notebook dur ing star tup and when you restar t the notebook. Windows P asswor ds Function Administrator pass word* Protects Windows administr ator-le v el access to notebook contents. User pass word* Protects access to a Windows user account. T o protect access to notebook contents when the notebook is resumed from standb y , you can set a pass word prompt to displa y . Refer to âSetting a Standby P assw ordâ in Chapter 3. *F or inf orm ation about setting a Wi ndo ws administrator pass word or a Windows user pass word, select Start > Help and Suppor t.
6â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security HP and Windo w s P as s w ord G uidelin es HP and W indows passw ords are not interchangeable. Y ou must use an HP password at an HP passw ord prompt and a W indows password at a W indo ws password prompt. F or e xample: â If a po wer -on password is set, the po wer-on passw ord (not a W indows passw ord) must be entered when the notebook starts up or restores from hibernation. â If you set W indows to prompt for a passw ord before resuming from standby , a W indo ws password (not a po wer-on password) must be entered to resume from standb y . The same word or series of letters or numbers used for an HP password can be used for another HP passw ord or for a W indows password, with the follo wing considerations: â The text of HP passw ords can be an y combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is not case sensiti ve. â An HP password must be set and entered with the same type of ke ys. For e xample, an HP password set with k eyboard number ke ys will not be recogniz ed if it is entered with ke ypad number ke ys. For information about the k e ypad, refer to âK eypadsâ in Chapter 2.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â7 Although you can use the same text for v arious passwords, HP passwords and W indo ws passwords function independently . Even if you plan to use the same text for an HP passw ord and a W indows passw ord, you must set the HP password in the Setup utility and the W indo ws password in your operating system. â Although their names are similar , an HP administrator password and a W indo ws administrator password ha ve dif ferent functions. For e xample, a W indo ws administrator password cannot be used to access the Setup utility , and an HP administrator password cannot provide administrator -lev el access to your notebook contents. Y ou can, ho we v er , use the same text for both passwords.
6â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Security HP Adminis trator P a ssw ord The HP administrator password protects the conf iguration settings and system identif ication information in the Setup utility . After this password is set, it mu st be entered to access the Setup utility . The HP administrator password â Is not interchangeable with a W indo ws administrator password, although both can use the same w ord or series of letters, or numbers. â Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. â Must be set and entered with the same type ke ys. For example, an HP administrator passw ord set with ke yboard number ke ys will not be recognized if you enter it with embedded numeric ke ypad number ke ys. â Can include any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is not case sensiti v e. Set ting HP Admini strator P assw ords An HP administrator password is set, changed, or deleted in the Setup utility . T o manage the password: 1. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in hiberna tion, turn the notebook on by pressing the po wer/standby b utton, and then shut down the notebook through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard dri v e is inserted into the notebook (not into an optional docking de vice or e xternal MultiBay).
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â9 3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. 4. Use the arro w ke ys to select Security > Administrator Pas sword , and then press enter . â T o set an HP administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Passw ord and Conf irm New Pas sword f ields, and then press enter . â T o change an HP administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Curr ent Password field, type the ne w password in the Enter New P assword and Conf irm New Passw ord fields, and then press enter . â T o delete an HP administrator password, type your current password in the Enter P assword f ield, press enter 3 times, and then press f10. 5. T o sav e your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and tak e ef fect when the notebook restarts. Enterin g HP Administrator P a ssw ords At the Enter SETUP Passw ord prompt, type your HP administrator password with the same k eys you used to set the password, and then press enter . After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the HP administrator password, you must restart the notebook and try again.
6â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security Po we r - O n P a s s w o r d s A po wer -on password pre vents unauthorized use of the notebook. After this password is set, it must be entered each time the notebook is turned on or restarted. A po wer -on password â Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. â Must be set and entered with the same type ke ys. For example, a po wer -on password set with k eyboard number ke ys will not be recognized if you enter it with embedded numeric ke ypad number ke ys. â Can include any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is not case sensiti v e. Set ting P o w er- O n P a ss w ords A po wer -on password is set, changed, or deleted in the Setup utility . T o manage the password: 1. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in hiberna tion, turn the notebook on by pressing the po wer/standby b utton, and then shut down the notebook through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard dri v e is inserted into the notebook (not into an optional docking de vice or e xternal MultiBay). 3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â11 4. Use the arro w ke ys to select Security > P ower -On password, and then press enter . â T o set a power -on password, type the password in the Enter New Pass word and Conf irm New Passw ord f ields, and then press enter . â T o change a power -on password, type the current password in the Enter Curr ent Password f ield, type the ne w password in the Enter New Password and Conf irm New Password f ields, and then press enter . â T o delete a power -on password, type the current password in the Enter Current Passw ord f ield, press enter 3 times, and then press f10. 5. T o sav e your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and tak e ef fect when the notebook restarts. Enterin g P o wer- On P a ssw ords At the po wer -on password prompt, type your passw ord, and then press enter . After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the notebook and try again.
6â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security De vice Security From the Setup utility De vice Security menu, you can disable the ability of the notebook to start fr om a CD or a diskette dri ve. T o disable or reenable notebook capabilities in the Setup utility: 1. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in hiberna tion, turn the notebook on by pressing the po wer/standby b utton, and then shut down the notebook through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard dri v e is inserted into the notebook (not into an optional docking de vice or e xternal MultiBay). 3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. 4. Select Security > Device Security , and then enter your preferences. 5. Use the arro w ke ys to select an item. Then: â T o disable an item, press f5 or f6 to toggle the f ield for the item to Disable, and then press enter . â T o reenble an item, press f5 or f6 to toggle the field for the item to Enable, and then press enter . 6. When a conf irmation prompt with your preference selected is displayed, press enter to sa ve your preference. 7. T o sav e your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and tak e ef fect when the notebook restarts.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â13 Anti vi rus Softw ar e When you use the notebook for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable your operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally . Anti virus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they ha ve caused. T o provide protection against ne wly discovered viruses, anti virus software must be updated. Norton AntiV irus is preinstalled on the notebook. For information about using and updating the Norton AntiV irus software: » Select Start > All Programs > Norton AntiV irus >Help and Support. For more information about computer viruses: 1. Select Start > Help and Support. 2. T ype viruses into the Search f ield. 3. Press enter .
6â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security Critical S ecurit y Up dates for Win dow s XP Ã CA UTION: Because ne w computer v iruses ar e being detec ted all the time , it is r ecommended that y ou install all c r itical u pdates as s oon as y ou r ecei ve an alert fr om Mic r os oft . Y ou should also run W indow s Update on a monthl y basis to ins tall the lates t r ecommended update s from Micr osoft. A Critical Security Updates for W indows XP disc may have been included with your notebook to provide additional updates deli vered after the computer w as conf igured. Throughout the life of the computer , Microsoft will continue to update the operating system and make these updates a vailable on their W eb site. T o update your system using the Critical Security Updates for W indows XP disc: 1. Insert the disc into the dri v e. The disc automatically runs the installation application. 2. Follo w the on-screen instructions to install all updates. This may take a fe w minutes. 3. Remov e the disc.
Security Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 6â15 Fir e w all Sof t w are When you use the notebook for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you, your notebook, and your data. Fire walls monitor all incoming and outgoing traf f ic on your computer by including features such as logging and reporting, automatic alarms, and user interfaces for conf iguring the fire wall. T o protect your pri v ac y , it is recommended that you use f ire wall softw are. Y our notebook comes with preinstalled f ire wall software. Refer to the online Help in the f ire wall softwa re application for additional information. â Under some circumstances a f ire wall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or f ile sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. T o temporarily solve the problem, disable the f irew all, perform the task that is interfering with the f ire wall, and then reenable the f ire wall. T o permanently resolve the problem, reconf igure the f ire wall.
6â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Security Opt io nal Secur it y Cable â Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not pre vent a product from being mishandled or stolen. T o install a security cable: 1. Loop the security cable around a secured object. 2. Insert the ke y 1 into the cable lock 2 . 3. Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot 3 , and then lock the cable lock with the ke y .
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â1 7 Har d w ar e Upg rad e s a nd Repl acem ents De vic e Conne ctio ns Conn ectin g An y P o wer ed De vice T o connect the notebook to an optional external de vice that has a po wer cord: 1. Be sure the de vice is turned of f. 2. Connect the de vice to the jack or jack on the notebook specif ied by the de vice manufacturer . 3. Plug the de vice po wer cord into a grounded A C outlet. 4. T urn on the de vice. â If a properly connected monitor or other display de vice does not display an image, try pressing the fn f4 hotke y to switch the image to the ne w de vice. T o disconnect a powered e xternal de vice from the notebook: 1. T urn of f the de vice. 2. Disconnect the de vice from the notebook.
7â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Con necti ng a USB De v ice USB (Uni versal Serial Bus) is a hardw are interface that can be used to connect an external de vice such as a USB ke yboard, mouse, dri ve, printer , scanner , or hub to the notebook or an optional Expansion Base. A hub is a connecting de vice that can be either po wered or unpo wered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB port on the notebook or to other USB hubs. H ubs support v arying numbers of USB de vices and are used to increase the number of USB de vices in the system. â Po wered hubs must be connected to external po wer . â Unpo wered hubs must be connected either to a USB port on the notebook or to a port on a po wered hub . The 3 USB ports (select models only) on the notebook support USB 2.0-compliant, USB 1.1-compliant, and USB 1.0-compliant de vices.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â3 Con necti ng a 1 3 9 4 De vic e (Sel ect Models On l y) IEEE 1394 is a hardware interf ace that can be used to connect a high-speed multimedia or data storage de vice to the notebook. Scanners, digital cameras, and digital camcorders often require a 1394 connection. Y ou might ha ve to load de vice-specific dri v ers and other software before using some 1394 de vices. F or information about de vice-specif ic software, refer to the de vice documentation or to the W eb site of the device manuf acturer or pro vider . The notebook 1394 port, illustrated belo w , supports IEEE 1394a de vices.
7â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Con necti ng a Com mun icat ion De vic e For information about connecting and using the modem, refer to the modem guides on the Notebook Documentation CD. Basic instructions for connecting the modem and setting up Internet service with an Internet service provider (ISP) are also pro vided in the printed Getting Started guide included with your notebook. For information about using an optional wireless de vice, visit http://www .hp.com/go/wireless. For information about using the Netw ork Service Boot to connect the notebook to a PXE (Preboot Execution En vironment) serv er during startup, see the âUsing Adv anced Setup Utility Featuresâ section in Chapter 8, âSoftware Updates and Reco v eries and System Software. â For more information about modem, wireless, and netw ork connections, select Start > Help and Support. The Help and Support utility provides communication information that includes instructions, tutorials, and wizards that can help you set up or troubleshoot a v ariety of connections. Modem, network, and wireless troubleshooting information is also provided in T r oubleshooting on the Notebook Documentation CD.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â5 Digital M emor y Cards The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader (select models only) can support: â Memory Stick and Memory Stick Pro â xD-Picture Card â MultiMediaCard â SmartMedia (SM) card â Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Digital memory cards are often used for digital storage on cameras, camcorders, and other handheld de vices. Y ou can set the notebook to open the f iles on a digital memory card in ways you specify . For e xample, you could set a digital memory card to open with a s lide sho w of the photographs it contains. For instructions, see the âSetting AutoPlay Preferencesâ section in Chapter 4, âMultimedia. â The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light and the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot described in the follo wing sections are a v ailable only on models which in clude a 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader .
7â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Using t he 6 -in - 1 Di gital Media Read er Light The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light is turned on when an inserted digital memory card is being accessed. The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light is turned of f when an inserted digital memory card is inacti ve or when the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot is v acant.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â7 Inser ting a Digital Me mory C ard à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt damage to digital me mory card co nnector s: â Use minimal f orce w hen insert ing a di gital memory card in to the 6 -in-1 Digital Media R eader slot . â Do not mo v e or tr ansport the notebook w h ile a di gital memory card is inserted in the 6 -in-1 Digital Media R eader slot . T o insert a digital memory card: 1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently slide the card into the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend outw ard slightly beyond the notebook.)
7â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Remo ving a Digital Memor y Card T o remove a digital memory card: 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are using the card. (T o stop a data transfer , select the cancel b utton in the W indows Cop ying windo w .) 2. Select the My Computer icon on the W indow s Desktop. 3. Right-click the dri v e assigned to the card, and then select Eject. (The card is stopped b ut is not released from the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot.) 4. Slide the card out of the slot.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â9 PC C a rd s à CA UTION: T o pr ese rve support fo r all PC C ar ds , do not install all o f the so ftwar e or an y of the ena blers pr ov ided b y a single PC C ar d manuf actur er . If yo u ar e instru cted b y the documentati on included w ith a P C Car d to install de v ice dr i v ers: â Install onl y the de v ice dr i v ers f or y our operating s ys tem . â Do not install other sof twar e , s uc h as c ar d ser vi ces, socket services, or enabler s, that mi ght also be suppli ed by the P C Car d manufac turer . A PC Card is a credit cardâsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specif ications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). PC Cards can be used to add modem, sound, storage, wi reless communication, or digital camera functions to the notebook. The notebook PC Card slot supports one T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card.
7â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Inser ting a PC C ar d à CA UTION: T o pr ev ent damage to the PC C ar d connector s: â Use minimal f orce w hen inserting a P C Car d into a P C Car d slot. â Do not mo ve or tr ansport the notebook w hile a PC Car d is inse rted. 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently slide the card into the slot until the card is seated.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â11 St oppi ng o r R emo v ing a P C Ca rd à CA UTION: T o p r event loss of work or an un r esp onsiv e s ystem , stop a PC Car d be for e r emo v ing it . â Stopping a PC Card, e ven if it is not in use, conserv es power . T o stop or remov e a PC Card: 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are supported by the PC Card. Then â T o stop the PC Card, select the Safely Remove Hard war e icon in the notif ication area, and then select the PC Card. (T o display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, right-click the taskbar , select Properties, clear the Hide inactiv e icons check box, and then select OK. ) â T o remov e the PC Card, stop the PC Card as described abov e, and then proceed to step 2. 2. Press the PC Card eject b utton 1 . (Y ou might need to press the b utton once to extend the b utton, and then press the button again to release the PC Card.) 3. Gently slide out the PC Card 2 .
7â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Driv es Addin g a Dri v e to t he S y s tem The internal hard dri v e and optical dri ve are standard features of the notebook. The type of optical dri ve v aries by notebook model. An optional dri v e can be added to the system by connecting it, as instructed in the dri v e documentation, to one of the USB ports or to the 1394 port. Hard dri v e capa city can also be added with a microdri ve PC Card or a digital memory card such as a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card. Using t he I DE Driv e Li ght Internal hard dri v e or optical dri ve acti vity is indicated by the IDE (Integrated Dri ve Electronics) light.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â13 C aring for Dri v es à CA UTION: T o pr e ve nt damage to the notebook or a dr i v e and loss of wo rk : â Do not r emov e the internal har d dri ve e x cept fo r r epair or r eplacement . F or instr ucti ons, s ee the âReplacing the Inter nal Hard Driveâ se ctio n next in this c hapter . â Electr ostatic dis c harge can damage e lectr onic components . T o pr e ve nt electr ostati c damage to the not ebook or a dri ve , follo w these 2 pr ecautions: (1) Dis char ge your self f r om stati c electr ic ity bef or e handling a dr i ve b y touching a gr ounded metal object and (2) A vo id touc hing the connector s on a dr i ve . F or mor e inf ormation about pr ev enting electr ostati c damage , r ef er to the âElec tr ost atic Disc har ge â chapte r in R egulatory and Safety Notice s on the Notebook Doc umentati on CD . â Ex cessi ve f or ce can damage dri v e connecto rs . When y ou insert a dr i ve , use o nly en ough for ce to seat the dr iv e . â Handle a dri ve car efull y . Do not drop it . â A v oi d e xposing a har d dr i ve or a disk ette to dev ices w ith magnetic f ields . Pr oducts w ith magnetic f ields inc lude video and a udio ta pe er asur e pr oducts , monitors , and speak ers. S ecur it y de v ice s w ith magnetic f ields include air port w alk -through de vice s and sec ur ity w ands. T he airport sec urity dev ices that c heck car ry-on luggage, usuall y w hile it is placed on a conv ey or belt, u se x -ra y s instead o f magnetism and w ill not damage a har d dri ve or a disk ette . â Do not spr a y a dr i ve w ith cleaners . â A v oi d e xposing a dr i v e to liq uids or tem per atur e e xtr emes . â If y ou mail a dr i v e , ship it in pack aging that pr otects it f r om shoc k, v ibr ation , extr eme temper ature s, and hi gh humidity . Labe l the pack age âFRA GILE . â
7â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts Replac ing t he Intern al Hard Driv e The hard dri ve in the hard dri ve bay is the internal hard dri ve. Remov e the internal hard driv e only for repair or replacement. Ã CA UTION: T o pr e ven t an unr esponsi ve s y stem and lo ss of w ork , do not begin this pr ocedur e until y ou â Sa v e yo ur w ork , clos e all open appli cations , and shut do wn the notebook . If y ou ar e unsure w het her the notebook is off or in hibernati on , turn the no tebook on and then shut it do wn thr ough the operating sy stem. â Disconnect all e xternal de vi ces connec ted to the notebook . â Disconnect the note book fr om e xter nal po w er and r emo v e the battery pack . For battery pack remo val instructions, see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â T o replace the internal hard driv e: 1. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 2. Loosen the 2 hard dri v e security scre ws.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â15 3. T o remov e the hard dri ve co v er and expose the hard dri ve tab, lift the cov er 1 upward and aw ay from the notebook 2 . 4. T o remov e the hard dri ve, pull upw ard on the hard dri ve tab 1 to release the hard dri v e, and then lift the hard dri ve 2 out of the hard dri ve bay .
7â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 5. T o insert the replacement hard driv e, tilt the connector edge of the hard dri v e 1 do wnward, and then lo wer the hard driv e into the hard dri v e bay until it is seated 2 .
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â17 6. Replace the hard dri v e cov er . a. Place the cov er o ver the hard dri ve bay . b . Slide the co v er 1 slightly to ward the right side of the notebook until the cov er is seated 2 .
7â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 7. T ighten the 2 hard driv e security scre ws.
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â19 Memory The notebook has 2 memory slots. Depending on your notebook model, either one or both memory slots might contain a replaceable memory module. Inc reasing M emory Y ou can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook by adding memory modules to v acant memory slots or by replacing installed memory modules. When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard dri ve space reserv ed for the hibernation f ile. Before you increase RAM, it is recommended that you verify that your hard dri v e has enough free space for the larger hibernation f ile. â T o display the amount of RAM in the system: Select Start > Help and Support. â T o display both the amount of free space on your hard driv e and the amount of space required by the hibernation f ile: Select Start > Contr ol Panel > P erf ormance and Maintenance > P ower Options > Hiber nate tab .
7â20 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts R emo vi ng or Inserti ng a Memory Mo dule à W ARN ING: T o pr e ve nt e xposur e to electr ical sh ock , access only the memory compartment during this pr ocedure . The memo ry compartment, the battery bay , and the har d dri ve ba y ar e the only u ser -accessible inter nal compartments on the notebook . All other ar eas that req uir e a tool to acces s should be opened only b y a service partner . à W ARN ING: T o pr e ve nt e xposur e to electr ical shock and damage t o the notebook , shut dow n the notebook, unplug the po wer cor d, and r emo v e the battery pack bef or e installing a me mory module. à CA UTION: T o pr ev ent elec tr os tatic dis char ge fr om damaging electr onic components: bef or e beginning this procedur e, dis char ge your self of stati c electr ic ity by touc hing a gr ounded metal ob ject . F or mor e info rmati on about pr ev enting elec tr ostati c damage , ref er to the âElectr ostatic Dis char ge â chapt er in Regulat ory and Safety Notices on the Notebook Doc umentati on CD . 1. Sa ve your w ork and close all open applications. 2. Shut do wn the notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is of f or in hibernation, turn the notebook on and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the notebook. 4. Disconnect the notebook from external po wer . 5. Remov e the battery pack. For instructions, see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section in Chapter 3, âPo wer . â
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â21 6. T urn the notebook upside do wn. 7. Loosen the 2 memory compartment scre ws 1 , and then lift up and remov e the memory compartment cover 2 .
7â2 2 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 8. Remov e a memory module. T o remove a memory module: a. Pull aw ay the retention clips on each side of the module 1 . (The module tilts upward.) b . Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module out of the memory slot 2 . c. T o protect a memory module after remov al, place it in an electrostatic-safe container .
Har dw are Upgr ades and Replaceme nts Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 7â2 3 T o insert a memory module: a. Align the ke yed (notched) edge of the module with the ke yed area in the memory slot 1 . If you are inserting a single memory module into a v acant memory compartment, insert the module into the right slot. (The follo wing illustration sho ws a memory module being inserted into the right slot of a memory compartment that contains a second memory module.) b . W ith the module at a 45-de gree angle from the surface of the memory compartment, press the module into the memory slot until it is seated 2. c. Push the module do wnward until the retention clips snap into place 3.
7â2 4 Hard war e and So ft w are Gui de Hard war e Upgr ades and Replacemen ts 9. T o close the memory compartment, align the tabs on the memory compartment cov er with the cover slots on the notebook, and then slide the cov e r o v er the memory compartment until it is seated 1 . 10. T ighten the 2 memory compartment screws 2 . 11. Replace the battery pack, reconnect the notebook to external po wer , and then restart the notebook.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â1 8 Sof t w are Upd ates an d Reco v eri es and S y s tem Soft w are Soft w are Upda tes For optimal notebook performance and to mak e sure your notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install the latest versions of the softw are pro vided with your notebook as they become a vailable. As with any other softw are modif ication, it is strongly recommended that you set a restore point before beginning a software update. F or instructions, see âUsing System Restoreâ later in this chapter . Y ou might f ind that the easiest way to update the software provided with your notebook is to use the softw are update links provided at Start > Help and Support. If you prefer to work from more detailed instructions, the supplementary information in the follo wing sections might help you to â Prepare for any update b y identifying your notebook category , product name, product number , and serial number . â Prepare for a R OM (read-only memory) update by identifying the R OM version currently installed on the notebook. â Access updates at the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site. â Do wnload and install updates.
8â2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Preparing for a Soft w are Upd ate If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your network administrator before installing an y software updates, particularly a R OM update. Accessin g Notebook Product Information T o access the updates for your notebook, you might need the follo wing information: â The product category is Notebook. â The product name, product number (P/N), and serial number (S/N) are provided on the Service T ag. The information on the Service T ag is provided at Start > Help and Support, and on the Service T ag label aff ixed to the bottom of the notebook. Accessin g Notebook RO M Inf orma tion T o determine whether an av ailable R O M update is a later RO M version than the R OM version currently installed on the notebook, you need to kno w the v ersion of the currently installed RO M . » T o display R OM information from within W indows, press the fn esc hotke y . In the fn esc display , the version of the system R OM is displayed as the BIOS (basic input-output system) date. On some notebook models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. T o clear the display , press esc. R OM information can also be displayed in the Setup utility . The procedure for displaying R OM information is described in this section. For more information about using the Setup utility , see the âSetup Utilityâ section later in this chapter .
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â3 T o display R OM information in the Setup utility: 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. If the Setup utility does not open with system information displayed, use the arro w ke ys to select the Main menu. (When the Main menu is selected, R OM and other system information is displayed.) 3. T o close the Setup utility without changing any settings, use the arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter . (The notebook restarts in W indows.) Do wnloa ding and Ins talling an Upd ate Most software at the http://www .hp.com/support We b site is packaged in compressed f iles called SoftP aqs. Some R OM updates might be packaged in compressed f iles called RO M P a q s . Most do wnload packages contain a f ile named Readme.txt. A Readme.txt f ile contains detailed descripti ve, installation, and troubleshooting information about the do wnload. The Readme.txt f iles included with R OMPaqs are in English only . The follo wing sections provide instructions for do wnloading and installing â A R OM update. â A SoftPaq containing an update other than a R OM update; for example, an application update.
8â4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Do wnloa ding and Installin g a R OM Upda te à CA UTION: T o pre v ent ser ious damage to the notebook or an unsucces sful installati on , do w nload and install a R OM updat e only w h ile the n otebook is connected to re liable e xternal po wer u sing the A C adapter . (Do not do w nload or install a R OM u pdate w hile the notebook is doc k ed in an optional Expansi on Base or r unning on battery pow er .) Dur ing the do w nload and installati on: â Do not unplug the n otebook f r om the A C outlet . â Do not sh ut do wn the n otebook or initiat e standb y or hibernati on . â Do not inse rt, r emov e, connec t , or disconnect an y dev ice , cable , or cor d. Do w nlo adi ng a R OM Updat e: 1. Access the page at the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook. 2. Select Start > Help and Support, and then select a softw are update link. 3. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the R OM update you want to do wnload. 4. At the do wnload area: a. Record the date, name, or other identif ier of any R OM update that is later than the R OM currently installed on your notebook. (Y ou might need this information to locate the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . Record the path to the def ault or custom location on the hard dri ve to which the R OM package will download. (Y ou might need to access the R OM package after it has been do wnloaded.) c. Follo w the online instructions to do wnload your selection to the hard dri v e.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â5 Installing a ROM Upd ate R OM installation procedures v ary . Follo w any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the do wnload is complete. If no instructions are displayed: 1. Open W indo ws Explorer . T o open W indows Explorer from the Start b utton, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > W indows Explor er . 2. In the left pane of the W indows Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation. (The hard dri ve designation is typically Local Disk C.) Then follo w the path you recorded earlier to the folder on your hard dri v e containing the update. 3. T o begin the installation, open the folder , and then double-click the f ile with an .ex e extensionâfor e xample, Filename.ex e. (The R OM update installation begins.) 4. T o complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen repor ts a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded f ile from the destination folder . Do wnloa ding and Installin g a Non -R OM SoftP a q T o update software other than the R OM: 1. Access the page at the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook. 2. Select Start > Help and Support, and then select a softw are update link. 3. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the SoftPaq you w ant to do wnload.
8â6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e 4. At the do wnload area: a. Write do wn the date, name, or other identif ier of the SoftPaq you plan to do wnload. (Y ou might need this information to locate the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . F ollo w the online instructions to do wnload the SoftP aq to the hard dri v e. 5. When the do wnload is complete, open W indo ws Explorer . To open W indo ws Explorer from the Start button, select Start > All Pr ograms > Accessories > Windo ws Explor er . 6. In the left pane of the W indows Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation (which is typically Local Disk C) > SWSetup. The destination folder for most do wnloads from the http://www .hp.com/support W eb site is the SWSetup folder . If you donâ t see the do wnload in the SWSetup folder , look in the My Documents folder . 7. In the destination folder , select the name or number of the software package you ha v e do wnloaded. 8. Select the f ile that includes an .ex e e xtensionâfor example, Filename.ex e. (The installation begins.) 9. T o complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen repor ts a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded f ile from the destination folder .
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â7 So ft w are Recov er ies Us in g S y stem R e sto r e System Restore is an operating system feature that enables you to undo harmful changes to your notebook software b y restoring your software to an earlier time, called a r estor e point, when your software w as functioning optimally . Restore points are restorable, benchmark âsnapshotsâ of your application, dri v er , and operating system files. The notebook sets restore points at regular interv als and might set additional restore points whene ver you change your personal settings or add software or hardwa re. Manually setting additional restore points provides additional protection for your system f iles and settings. It is recommended that you manually set restore points â Before you add or extensi vely modify softw are or hardware. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . Restoring to any restore point does not af fect your data f iles. For example, restoring your system softw are to an earlier time will not af fect documents or e-mails that you sa ved after that time. All System Restore procedures are re v ersible.
8â8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Set ting a Re store P oin t T o set a system restore point manually: 1. Select Start > Help and Support > System Restor e. 2. Select Cr eate a restor e point, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Res torin g to a Rest ore P oi nt T o restore the notebook to a restore point: 1. Make sure the notebook is connected to reliable e xternal po wer through the A C adapter . 2. Select Start > Help and Support > System Restor e. 3. Select Restor e my computer to an earlier time, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Repairing or Reinstallin g Soft w are If it e ver becomes necessary to repair or reinstall your de vice dri v ers, an application, or your operating system, refer to Appendix B, âSystem Restore, â in the Getting Started guide.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â9 Q uick La unc h But tons Control P anel Y ou can use the Quick Launch Buttons control panel to â Set preferences for the display of the Quick Launch Buttons icon. â Change the size and arrangement of icons and text on your W indows desktop. â Display hotke ys information. â Set b utton assignments for the Easy Access b uttons on an optional external k e yboard. The follo wing sections provide instructions for setting preferences within the control panel. For additional onscreen information about any item on the control panel, select the help b utton in the upper-right corner of the windo w . The help b utton is identified with a question mark icon. Accessing t he Q uic k Launc h Bu t tons Cont r ol Pa n e l Y ou can access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the Start b utton or from an icon that you can display in the notif ication area or W indows desktop. » T o access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the Start b utton, select Start > Control P anel > Quick Launch Buttons.
8â10 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Set ting Windo w s D esktop Icon Dis play Pref erences T o change the size of the icons on your desktop and of the text displayed with them: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select Start > Control P anel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Zoom tab . 3. Adjust the slider to ward the left and right until your icon display preference is displayed in the illustration abov e the slider . 4. T o sav e your preference and close the display , select OK. If you select a very lar ge icon display and hav e set your operating system to Auto Arrange the icons on your W indows desktop, the icons might ov erlap. T o clear the Auto Arrange setting: 1. Right-click an open area on your W indo ws desktop. 2. Select Arrange Icons By . 3. Select A uto Arrange to remo ve the check and disable Auto Arrange.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â11 Disp lay ing t he Q uick La unc h But tons Icon T o show or hide the Quick Launch Buttons Properties icon in the notif ication area or your W indo ws desktop: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select Start > Contr ol Panel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Advanced tab . On the Adv anced tab you can â Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area. â T o display the icon, select the Show icon on the taskbar check box. â T o hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the taskbar check box. â Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon on your W indows desktop. â T o display the icon, select the Show icon on the desktop check box. â T o hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the desktop check box. 3. T o sav e your preferences and close the display , select OK.
8â12 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Disp lay ing H otk e y Infor ma tion A hotke y is a preset combination of the fn ke y and another ke y , such as a function ke y ( f1 through f12 ) or the esc key . T o display information about the hotkey functions a vailable on your notebook: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select Start > Control P anel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Function K eys tab . 3. T o close the display , select OK. For more information about hotk e ys, see the âHotke ysâ section in Chapter 2, âT ouchPad and K eyboard. â
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â13 Set ting Bu t ton Assignm ents on an External Key b o a r d If you are using an optional external k eyboard that features Easy Access buttons, you can set Easy Access b utton assignments and schemes on the Settings tab . The Settings tab is disabled and hidden by def ault. T o display and enable the Settings tab in the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: 1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel: â Select S tart > Contr ol Panel > Quick Launch Buttons. - or - â Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notif ication area or W indo ws desktop. 2. Select the Advanced tab . Then â T o display and enable the Settings tab, select the check box for Allow users to modify b utton assignments on external k eyboard. â T o disable and hide the Settings tab, clear the check box for Allow users to modify b utton assignments on external k eyboard. 3. T o sav e your preferences and close the display , select OK. For information about managing Easy Access b utton assignments and schemes, refer to your ke yboard documentation.
8â14 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Setup U tility The Setup utility is a R OM-base d information and customization utility that can be used e ven when your operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the notebook and provides settings for startup, security , and other preferences. Step-by-step instructions for setting specif ic preferences are included by topic earlier in this guide. F or example, procedures for setting password and other security preferences are pro vided in Chapter 6, âSecurity . â Openin g th e Setup Utilit y T o open the Setup Utility: 1. T urn on or restart the notebook in W indows. 2. Before W indo ws opens and while the âPress <F10> to enter setupâ prompt is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen, press f10.
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â15 C hangin g th e Langua ge of t he Setup U tility The follo wing procedure explains ho w to change the language of the Setup utility . If the notebook is not in the Setup utility , begin at step 1. If the notebook is in the Setup utility , begin at step 2. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arro w ke ys to select the Advanced menu. 3. Press f5 or f6 (or use the arro w ke ys) to select a language, and then press enter . 4. When a conf irmation prompt with your preference selected is displayed, press enter to sa ve your preference. 5. T o set your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are in ef fect when the notebook restarts in W indows. Naviga ting and S elec ting in t he Setup U tility Because the Setup utility is not W indows-based, it does not support the T ouchPad. Na vigation and selection are b y ke ystroke. â T o choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow k e ys. â T o choose an item in a drop-down list or to toggle a f ield, for example an Enable/Disable f ield, use either the arrow ke ys or f5 or f6. â T o select an item, press enter . â T o close a text box or return to the menu display , press esc. T o display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup utility is open, press f1.
8â16 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Disp layi n g S y s tem Inf orma tion The follo wing procedure explains ho w to display system information in the Setup utility . If the Setup utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup utility is open, be gin at step 2. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. Access the system information on the Main and Advanced menus. â T o display most of the system information av ailable in the Setup utility , use the arro w ke ys to select the Main menu. â T o display video memory information, use the arrow k e ys to select the Advanced menu. 3. T o close the Setup utility without changing any settings, use the arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter . (The notebook restarts in W indows.)
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â17 Re s toring Default Set tin gs in t he Setup Utilit y The follo wing procedure explains ho w to restore the Setup utility default settings. If the notebook is not in the Setup utility , begin at step 1. If the notebook is in the Setup utility , begin at step 2. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook in W indows, and then press f10 while the prompt âPress <F10> to enter setupâ is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. 2. Press f10. 3. When the Setup Conf irmation is displayed, press enter to sa ve your preferences. 4. T o set your preferences and exit the Setup utility , press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. The Setup utility default settings are set when you e xit the Setup utility and are in ef fect when the notebook restarts. Identif ication information, including R OM version information, is retained.
8â18 Hard war e and S oftwar e Guide So ftwar e Update s and Re cov eri es and S ys tem S oftwar e Using Adv an ced Setup U tility Features This guide describes the Setup utility features recommended for all users. For more information about the Setup utility features recommended for adv anced users only , refer to the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. The Setup utility features a v ailable for adv anced users include a hard dri ve self-test, a Netw ork Service Boot, and settings for boot order preferences. The â<F12> to boot from LANâ me ssage that is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen each time the notebook is started or restarted in W indo ws or restored from hibernation is the prompt for a Network Service Boot. The âPress <ESC> to change boot orderâ message that is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen each time the notebook is started or restarted in W indo ws or restored from hibernation is the prompt to change the boot order .
So ftwar e Updates and R ecov eri es and S yst em So ftwar e Hard war e and Softwar e Guide 8â19 C losing t he Setup U tility Y ou can close the Setup utility with or without sa ving changes. â T o close the Setup utility a nd sav e your changes from the current session, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Press f10, and then follo w the instructions on the screen. - or - â If the Setup utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display . Then use arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Sa ving Changes, and then press enter . When you use the f10 procedure, you are of fered an option to return to the Setup utility . When you use the Exit Saving Changes procedure, the Setup utility closes when you press enter . â T o close the Setup utility w ithout saving your changes from the current session: If the Setup utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display . Then use arro w ke ys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter . After the Setup utility closes, the notebook restarts in W indow s.
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Aâ1 A Spec ifi cat ions Op er atin g En vironment The operating en vironment information in the following table might be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook in extreme en vironments. Fac to r Metric U. S . T emperature Operating 10°C to 35°C 50°F to 95°F Nonoperating -20°C to 60°C -4°F to 140°F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating 10% to 90% 10% to 90% Nonoperating 5% to 95% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressuri z ed) Operating -15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft
Aâ2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Spe c ific atio ns Rated Inp ut P o w er The po wer information in this section might be helpful if you plan to tra vel internationally with the notebook. The notebook operates on DC po wer , which can be supplied by an A C or a DC po wer source. Although the notebook can be po wered from a stand-alone DC po wer source, it is strongly that the notebook be po wered only with an A C adapter or DC po wer cord supplied with or approv ed for an HP notebook. The notebook is capable of accepting DC po wer within the follo wing specif ications. This product is designed for IT po wer systems in Norway with phase-to-phase v oltage not exceeding 230 Vrms. Input P ower Rating Operating v oltage 18.5V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W Operating current 3.5 A
Spe c ific atio ns Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Aâ3 Expansion P or t Inp ut/Ou tpu t Signals The expansion port signal information in this section might be helpful if you plan to use an optional expansion product that connects to the expansion port on your notebook. This port is illustrated in the âLeft-Side Componentsâ section of Chapter 1, âHardware. â Optional expansion products that connect to the notebook through the expansion port might include an Expansion Base or an HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable. The follo wing table identif ies the input and output signals supported by the e xpansion port on your notebook. Feature Support USB 2.0 Ye s 10/100 Ether net Ye s Gigabit Ether net No IEEE 1394 (4-pin por t) Ye s Consumer IR (f or optional remote control only) Ye s P ower inputs 65 W Composite TV Ye s S-Video TV Ye s Component TV No S/PDIF audio Ye s DV I No Headphone/speaker audio-out Ye s Microphone audio-in Ye s
Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â15, 7â3 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light 1â15 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot 1â15, 7â5 A AC adapter 1â19 AC power vs. battery power 3â1 administrator password 6â5 airport security devices 7â13 altitude specifications Aâ1 antennae 1â8 antivirus software 6â13 application recovery disc 1â20 applications key, Windows 1â2 applications, reinstalling or repairing 1â20 applications. See software audio-in (microphone) jack 1â11 , 4â4 audio-out (headphone) jack 1â11 , 4â3 Auto/Air/AC Adapter 3â2, 3â14 Automobile Power Adapter/Charger 3â2, 3â14 AutoPlay 4â10 B base, docking. See Expansion Base battery bay 1â18, 1â21 battery light displaying charge status 3â15 , 3â17 identifying 1â10 , 3â4 battery pack battery power vs. AC power 3â1 calibrating 3â19 charging 3â14 conserving power 3â23 diagnostic information 8â16 disposing of 3â27 inserting 3â26 low-battery conditions 3â17 monitoring charge 3â15 removing 3â25 storing 3â27
Inde xâ2 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x battery pack release latch 1â18 , 3â25 bays battery 1â18, 1â21 hard drive 1â18 See also compartments BIOS information, displaying 6â2 , 8â2 Bluetooth device, wireless light 1â6, 1â9 Bluetooth label 1â21 boot order 8â18 buttons display release 1â11 Easy Access 8â13 mute 1â7, 4â2 PC Card eject 1â14, 7â11 power 1â4, 3â8, 3â12 TouchPad 1â3 volume 1â7 , 4â2 wireless 1â6, 1â7 See also battery pack release latch; display switch; keys C cable lock, security 6â16 cables audio 4â5 HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable 2â9 modem 1â19 network 1â13 S-Video 4â5 See also power cord calibration, battery 3â19 camcorder connecting 7â3 digital memory cards 7â5 camera connecting 7â3 digital memory cards 7â5 caps lock light 1â5 card and socket services, PC Card 7â9 card. See digital memory cards; memory; PC Card category view, Windows XP 2â3 CDs audio, hotkeys 4â9 copying 4â12 copyright warning 4â12 creating 4â12 inserting, removing 4â8 multimedia applications 4â16 playing 4â9, 4â11, 4â15 setting AutoPlay preferences 4â10 writing to 4â12 See also recovery discs Certificate of Authenticity label 1â21 classic view, Windows 2â3 Compaq administrator password 6â5 compartments memory 1â17, 7â19 Mini PCI 1â17 See also bays
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ3 composite video 2â9 Computer Setup, setting security preferences 6â3 connectors drive 7â13 power 1â13 See also jacks; ports conservation, power 3â23 cord, power identifying 1â19 See also cables country-specific modem adapter 1â19 critical low-battery condition 3â17 D default settings, restoring Setup utility 8â17 desktop, Windows, setting icon display preferences 8â10 device disabling 6â12 device security 6â12 device, connecting powered 7â1 digital memory cards 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 7â5 inserting 7â7 removing 7â8 setting AutoPlay preferences 4â10 types supported 7â5 disc, optical. See CDs; DVDs diskette affected by airport security 7â13 protecting playback 3â7 display release button 1â11 display switch identifying 1â4 , 3â4 setting preferences 3â12 display, internal controlling brightness 2â11 switching image 2â9 driver recovery disc 1â20 drivers, reinstalling or repairing 1â20 drives adding to system 7â12 affected by airport security 7â13 avoiding standby and hibernation while using discs, diskettes 3â7, 4â11 boot order 8â18 caring for 7â13 IDE drive light 7â12 shipping 7â13 USB 7â2 See also CDs; DVDs; hard drive DVDs changing regional settings 4â13 creating 4â17 hotkeys 4â9 inserting, removing 4â8 multimedia applications 4â16
Inde xâ4 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x playing 4â9 , 4â11 , 4â15 setting AutoPlay preferences 4â10 writing to 4â12 See recovery discs E Easy Access buttons 8â13 eject buttons optical drive 4â8 PC Card 7â11 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 7â13 , 7â20 emergency shutdown procedures 3â11 enablers, PC Card 7â9 environmental specifications Aâ1 , Aâ2 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 7â13 , 7â20 exhaust vent 1â12, 1â18 Expansion Base as power source 3â2 docking, undocking while using disc, diskette 4â11 expansion port on notebook 1â13 monitor port 2â9 USB support 7â2 expansion port 1â13, Aâ3 external numeric keypad 2â17 F F12 to boot from LAN message 8â18 firewall software 6â15 flash memory cards 7â5 fn key 1â2 function keys ( f1, f2, etc.) 2â5 G Getting Started 1â20 H hard drive affected by airport security 7â13 displaying amount of free space on 7â19 replacing internal 7â14 self-test 8â18 space on, required for hibernation file 7â19 hard drive bay identifying 1â18 replacing hard drive 7â14 headphone (audio-out) jack 1â11 , 4â3 headphones 4â3 Help and Support Center 2â7 hibernation avoiding when using discs, diskettes 3â7, 4â11 defined 3â6 enabling/disabling 3â6 identifying 7â14 initiated during critical low-battery condition 3â17 initiating 3â10 restoring from 3â6, 3â10 setting preferences 3â12 when to use 3â6 hibernation file 3â6, 7â19
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ5 hotkey commands access Help and Support Center 2â7 control media activity (play, pause, stop, etc.) 2â12 , 4â9 , 8â2 decrease display brightness 2â11 display system information 2â13 increase display brightness 2â11 initiate QuickLock 2â11 initiate standby 3â9, 3â12 open Internet Explorer 2â8 open print options window 2â8 Quick Reference 2â6 switch image 2â9 hotkeys displaying functions on the screen 8â12 identifying 1â1 , 2â5 procedures 2â7 Quick Reference 2â6 using with external keyboard 2â7 HP administrator password 6â5 HP password 6â5 HP password guidelines 6â6 HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable 2â9 hub, USB 7â2 humidity specifications Aâ1 I icons on Windows desktop, setting display preferences 8â10 IDE drive light 1â10, 7â12 identifying components bottom 1â17 front 1â9 left-side 1â12 rear 1â12 right-side 1â15 top 1â1 IEEE 1394 port 1â15, 7â3 Internet Connection wizard 2â8 Internet Explorer 2â8 InterVideo WinDVD Creator 4â16 InterVideo WinDVD Player 4â14 , 4â16 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 1â11 , 4â4 audio-out (headphone) 1â11 , 4â3 RJ-11 (modem) 1â13 RJ-45 (network) 1â13 S-Videoâout 1â16, 4â5 See also connectors; ports K keyboard, external 2â7, 8â13 keypad, embedded numeric identifying 1â2 , 2â14 procedures 2â15
Inde xâ6 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x keypad, external numeric, procedures 2â17 keys fn 1â2 function ( f1, f2, etc.) 1â1 hotkeys 1â1, 2â5 keypad 1â2 , 2â14 num lock 2â15 scroll lock 2â7 shift 2â16, 3â10 Windows applications 1â2 Windows logo 1â1 See also buttons; display switch L labels Bluetooth 1â21 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 1â21 Modem Approval 1â21 Regulatory 1â21 Service Tag 1â21 wireless certification 1â21 WLAN 1â21 language, changing in Setup utility 8â15 latch, battery pack release 1â18 See also buttons; display switch lights 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 1â15 battery 1â10, 3â15 , 3â17 caps lock 1â5 IDE drive 1â10, 7â12 mute 1â5 , 4â2 num lock 1â6, 2â15 power/standby 1â9 , 3â8 power/standby button 1â5 TouchPad 2â1 wireless 1â9 wireless button 1â6 lock, security cable 1â16, 6â16 lock-up, system 3â11 low-battery condition 3â17 M Media Player, Windows 4â16 media, digital 7â5 memory displaying amount of 2â7, 7â19 increasing RAM 7â19 memory card reader 7â5 memory compartment 1â17, 7â21 memory module, removing or inserting 7â20 Memory Reader light 7â6 Memory Reader slot 7â6 Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro 7â5 microphone 4â4 microphone (audio-in) jack 1â11 , 4â4 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 1â21 Mini PCI compartment 1â17
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ7 model, identifying notebook 2â7 , 8â2 modem country-specific adapter 1â19 documentation 7â4 modem (RJ-11) jack 1â13 Modem Approval label 1â21 modem cable 1â19 monitor connecting 7â1 switching image 2â9, 7â1 monitor port 1â13 mouse, external setting preferences 2â3 USB 7â2 MultiMediaCard 7â5 mute button 1â7, 4â2 mute light 1â5, 4â2 N network (RJ-45) jack 1â13 network cable 1â13 network documentation 7â4 Network Service Boot 8â18 Norton AntiVirus 6â13 notebook model, family, type, and serial number 2â7, 8â2 num lock key 2â15 num lock light 1â6, 2â15 numeric keypad. See keypad, external numeric; keypad, embedded numeric O operating environment specifications Aâ1 operating system Internet Connection wizard 2â8 loading 3â8 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 1â21 passwords 6â5 Product Key 1â21 security 6â2 shutting down 3â8, 3â11 operating system recovery disc 1â20 operating system, Windows reinstalling or repairing 1â20 optical disc. See CDs; DVDs optical drive identifying 1â15 inserting, removing disc 4â8 See also CDs; drives; DVDs P passwords forgetting 6â4 HP 6â5 HP guidelines 6â6 power-on 6â10 QuickLock 2â11 standby 3â12
Inde xâ8 Har dw are and S oftwar e Guide Inde x using 6â4 Windows 6â5 Windows administrator 2â11 Windo ws guidelines 6â6 Windows user 2â11 passwords, coordinating 6â6 PC Card configuring 7â9 inserting, removing 7â10 stopping 7â11 types supported 7â9 PC Card eject button 1â14, 7â11 PC Card slot 1â14, 7â10 PCFriendly 4â15 pointing device 2â2 ports 1394 1â15 , 7â3 expansion port 1â13 external monitor 1â13, 2â9 USB 1â13, 1â15 , 7â2 See also connectors; jacks power conserving 3â6, 3â23 control and light locations 3â4 schemes 3â12 setting preferences 3â12 sources 3â1 switching between AC and battery 3â3 See also battery pack; hibernation; shutdown procedures; standby power connector 1â13 power cord external device 7â19 notebook 1â19 See also cables Power Meter icon 3â3, 3â16 power/standby button default functions 3â8 identifying 1â4 , 3â4 resetting notebook with 3â11 setting preferences 3â12 power/standby light 1â5, 1â9 , 3â8 powered device, connecting 7â1 power-on password 6â5 Press ESC to change boot order message 8â18 Product Key 1â21 product name and number, notebook 1â21, 2â7 projector connecting 1â13, 7â1 switching image 2â9 PXE server 7â4 Q QuickLock 2â11 QuickLock hotkey 6â3 R RAM (random access memory) 7â19 reader, memory card 7â5 recovery discs 1â20 regional settings for DVDs 4â13
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Inde xâ9 regulatory information Modem Approval label 1â21 Regulatory label 1â21 wireless certification labels 1â21 reinstalling or repairing software 1â20 release latch, battery pack 1â18 , 3â25 reset (emergency shutdown procedures) 3â11 restore point 8â7 RJ-11 (modem) jack 1â13 RJ-45 (network) jack 1â13 ROM determining current version of 8â2 downloading and installing 8â4 obtaining updates 8â3 ROMPaq 8â3 S scanner 7â3 screen saver 3â24 scroll lock key 2â7 scrolling regions, TouchPad 1â3 , 2â2 Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card 7â5 security cable lock, connecting 6â16 security cable slot 1â16 security features 6â1 security features on notebook 6â3 serial number, notebook 1â21 , 2â7 series, notebook 8â2 Service Tag 1â21 Setup utility changing language 8â15 displaying system information 8â16 navigation and selection 8â15 Network Service Boot 7â4 , 8â18 opening 8â14 restoring default settings 8â15 , 8â17 setting security preferences 6â3 shift key embedded numeric keypad function 2â16 hibernation function 3â10 shutdown procedures 3â8 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 7â5 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot 7â6 sleep button 2â10 Sleep. See standby slots 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader 1â15, 7â5 memory 7â19 PC Card 1â14 security cable 1â16
Inde xâ10 Hard war e and So ftwar e Guide Inde x SmartMedia (SM) card 7â5 socket services, PC Card 7â9 SoftPaq 8â3, 8â5 software antivirus 6â13 AutoPlay 4â10 firewall 6â2, 6â15 Internet Connection wizard 2â8 multimedia applications 4â13 , 4â15 Power Meter 3â16 reinstalling or repairing 1â20 repair, reinstallation documentation 8â8 ROMPaq 8â3 security features 6â1 Setup utility 8â14 SoftPaq 8â3 System Restore 8â7 updating 8â1 Sonic RecordNow! 4â14, 4â16 speakers external 4â3 internal 1â11, 4â1 specifications operating environment Aâ1 rated input power Aâ2 standby avoiding when using discs, diskettes 3â7, 4â11 initiated during critical low-battery condition 3â17 initiating 3â9 password 3â12 power/standby light 1â5, 1â9 resuming from 3â9 setting preferences 3â12 stereo speakers external 4â3 internal 1â11, 4â1 S-Videoâout jack 1â16, 4â5 switch, display identifying 1â4 , 3â4 setting preferences 3â12 system information, displaying 8â2, 8â16 system lock-up 3â11 System Restore 8â7 T telephone jack (RJ-11 jack) 1â13 television connecting audio 4â3 connecting video 4â6 temperature specifications Aâ1 storage, battery pack 3â27 1394 port 1â15, 7â3 TouchPad 1â3, 2â1 traveling with notebook battery pack temperature considerations 3â27 environmental specifications Aâ1
Inde x Hard war e and Softwar e Guide Indexâ11 Modem Approval label 1â21 wireless certification labels 1â21 turning off notebook 3â8, 3â11 turning on notebook 3â8 tutorials 2â7, 4â15, 7â4 U unresponsive system, emergency shutdown procedures 3â11 USB devices, connecting 7â2 USB ports, identifying 1â13, 1â15 user passwords 6â5 V VCR connecting audio 4â3 connecting video 4â5 vents, exhaust 1â12, 1â18 video device connecting 4â5, 7â1 turning on or off 4â7 viruses, antivirus software 6â13 volume buttons 1â7 volume, adjusting 4â2 W Windows applications key 1â2 Windows category vs. Windows classic view 2â3 Windows desktop, setting icon display preferences 8â10 Windows firewall 6â2 Windows logo key 1â1 Windows Media Player 4â16 Windows MovieMaker 4â16 Windows password guidelines 6â6 WinDVD Creator 4â16 WinDVD Player 4â16 wireless types of WLAN adapters 5â7 wireless local area network (WLAN) 5â7 WLAN software 5â8 wireless button 1â7, 5â11 wireless certification label 1â21 wireless device antennae 1â8 wireless device documentation 7â4 wireless LAN device Mini PCI compartment 1â17 wireless button 1â7 wireless light 1â6, 1â9 wireless light 1â6, 1â9 WLAN identifying devices 5â7 software 5â8 troubleshooting 5â8 types 5â7 WLAN label 1â21 X xD-Picture Card 7â5